Sunteți pe pagina 1din 250

FANUC PICTURE & F PAssist

For Windows

OPERATORS MANUAL

B-66254EN/05

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.


All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country
from where the product is exported.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as impossible.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by or in the main body.

B-66254EN/05

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE


This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,
Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.
- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-66254EN/05

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE .................................s-1
1

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 1

SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9

INSTALLING THE TOOL ...................................................................... 13


3.1
3.2

3.3

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................... 4


SCREENS CREATABLE WITH THE TOOL .................................................. 5
RESTRICTIONS ............................................................................................ 7
SETTING ON THE CNC SIDE....................................................................... 8
CREATING A SCREEN IN A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN JAPANESE ........ 9
I/O DEDICATED TO THE OPERATOR'S PANEL ......................................... 9
INDICATOR DISPLAY WHEN THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION
(TWO-SCREEN DISPLAY) IS USED .......................................................... 10
BUTTON AND LAMP SIGNAL DISPLAY FUNCTION ................................. 11
MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN AND 5- BUTTON MENU ........................ 12
INSTALLING MICROSOFT VISUAL BASIC ................................................ 14
INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPASSIST ............................................ 15
3.2.1

INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist / (A08B-9010-J513 #ZZ11)..........15

3.2.2

Initializing the Add-in Tools for Excel2000 ..........................................................17

UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPASSIST ....................................... 19

USING FANUC PICTURE ..................................................................... 20


4.1
4.2

ACTIVATING FANUC PICTURE ................................................................. 21


PROCEDURE FOR SCREEN CREATION .................................................. 25
4.2.1

Procedure for Creating Standard Screens for Toyota Motor..................................25

4.2.2

Procedure for Creating Screens That Support Multi-Language Display


Switching................................................................................................................26

4.3

SETTING A MENU FUNCTION................................................................... 27


4.3.1

CREATING A NEW PROJECT ............................................................................27

4.3.2

OPENING A PROJECT.........................................................................................30

4.3.3

Setting a Project......................................................................................................30

4.3.4

EDITING A PROJECT ..........................................................................................35

4.3.5

ACTIVATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist) .........35

4.3.6

Multi-Language Batch Input ..................................................................................36

4.3.7

Creating Memory Card Format Data......................................................................36


c-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.3.8

B-66254EN/05

COPYING OPERATOR'S PANEL SCREEN DATA AND THE FP DRIVER


TO A MEMORY CARD........................................................................................39

4.3.9

COMPOSITE SCREEN DISPLAY .......................................................................40


4.3.9.1
4.3.9.2

4.3.10

Operation for Composite Screen Display .......................................................... 41


Method of Composite Screen Output ................................................................ 43

Assistant V-UP .......................................................................................................44

DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE CNC ................................. 46

OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL


(FPASSIST)........................................................................................... 48
6.1
6.2

6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7

OVERVIEW OF FPASSIST ......................................................................... 49


REGISTERING/CHANGING/DELETING OPERATOR'S PANEL
SCREENS ................................................................................................... 50
6.2.1

Create .....................................................................................................................50

6.2.2

Move ......................................................................................................................51

6.2.3

Del

6.2.4

Copy ......................................................................................................................52

6.2.5

Rename...................................................................................................................52

......................................................................................................................51

CHECKING SCREEN DATA ....................................................................... 53


CONVERTING DATA .................................................................................. 53
VERSION DISPLAY .................................................................................... 54
UPGRADING TO THE LATEST VERSION ................................................. 54
MINIMIZATION ............................................................................................ 54

SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT


TOOL (FPASSIST)................................................................................ 55
7.1
7.2

SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE USING FPASSIST ............................ 56


SCREEN REGISTRATION AND SETTING OF THE ENTIRE SYSTEM ..... 57
7.2.1

Edition Display Screen...........................................................................................57

7.2.2

Operation Time Setting Screen ..............................................................................58

7.2.3

Screen Switch Menu...............................................................................................59

7.2.4

Registering Screens ................................................................................................60

7.2.5

Screen Registration - Setting Table (1/4) ...............................................................61


7.2.5.1

7.3

Default name button .......................................................................................... 63

7.2.6

Automatic Screen Switching, Initial Screen Setting, etc. - Setting Table (2/4) .....64

7.2.7

Shift Time Setting - Setting Table (3/4) .................................................................68

7.2.8

Output of Internal Operator's Panel Data - Setting Table (4/4)..............................69

FAULT DISPLAY SCREEN ......................................................................... 71


c-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-66254EN/05

7.3.1

Components............................................................................................................72
7.3.1.1
7.3.1.2

7.4

7.3.2

Lamp Setting - Setting Table (1/2).........................................................................75

7.3.3

Button Area Setting - Setting Table (2/2)...............................................................76

MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN (COMMON SPECIFICATIONS


FOR PAGE 1 AND PAGE 2) ....................................................................... 77
7.4.1

Screen Configuration..............................................................................................77
7.4.1.1
7.4.1.2

7.5

Lamp and Manual Button Setting - Setting Tables (1/3, 2/3) ................................79

7.4.3

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (3/3) ..............................................80

NC OPERATION SCREEN.......................................................................... 81
Screen Configuration..............................................................................................81
7.5.1.1
7.5.1.2
7.5.1.3

Alarm display subscreen.................................................................................... 82


Axis coordinate display subscreen..................................................................... 82
Program check subscreen .................................................................................. 83

7.5.2

Lamp Area and Button Area Setting - Setting Tables (1/4, 2/4) ............................85

7.5.3

Path Selection Signal Setting - Setting Table (3/4) ................................................87

7.5.4

Fault Message Setting - Setting Table (4/4) ...........................................................90

TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 1 SCREEN ................................................ 91


7.6.1

Screen Configuration..............................................................................................91
7.6.1.1
7.6.1.2
7.6.1.3
7.6.1.4

7.7
7.8

Numeric display subscreen ................................................................................ 78


Signal monitor subscreen................................................................................... 78

7.4.2

7.5.1

7.6

LMP01 to LMP63: Lamps................................................................................. 72


BTN01 to BTN07: Manual buttons ................................................................... 72

Setting and display of pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values ........................... 92


Measurement of the current value counter ........................................................ 92
Display of tool exchange information ............................................................... 93
Resetting of a current value counter .................................................................. 93

7.6.2

Counter Setting - Setting Table (1/3) .....................................................................94

7.6.3

Ten-Key Pad Setting - Setting Table (2/3) .............................................................95

7.6.4

Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3) ......................................................96

TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 2 SCREEN ................................................ 97


TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN .......................................... 99
7.8.1

Screen Configuration..............................................................................................99
7.8.1.1
7.8.1.2
7.8.1.3
7.8.1.4
7.8.1.5
7.8.1.6

Setting and display of limit values................................................................... 100


Compensation operation .................................................................................. 100
Display and resetting of a current value .......................................................... 101
Compensation processing ................................................................................ 101
When two paths are used ................................................................................. 102
Interlock (available with E3.02 and later) ....................................................... 102

7.8.2

Setting of Counter Names and So Forth - Setting Table (1/3) .............................103

7.8.3

Counter Signal Setting - Setting Table (2/3) ........................................................104


c-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.8.4

7.9

7.10

7.11

B-66254EN/05

Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3) ....................................................105

RUNNING DISPLAY SCREEN .................................................................. 106


7.9.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................106

7.9.2

Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3) ..............................................................107

7.9.3

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3) ............................................107

7.9.4

Running Display Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3)...........................................108

RUNNING DISPLAY 2 SCREEN ............................................................... 109


7.10.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................109

7.10.2

Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3) ..............................................................110

7.10.3

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3) ............................................110

7.10.4

Operation Indicator Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3).......................................111

FAULT COUNT SCREEN (USED FOR 36 AND 168 FAULT ITEMS) ....... 112
7.11.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................112
7.11.1.1 Counting of the number of faults and measurement of stop time .................... 113
7.11.1.2 Page switch method ......................................................................................... 114
7.11.1.3 Relationship with the operational situation screen .......................................... 114

7.11.2

7.12

Fault Count Related Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ................................................115

CYCLE TIME MEASUREMENT SCREEN................................................. 116


7.12.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................116
7.12.1.1 Edge type operation ......................................................................................... 117
7.12.1.2 Level type operation ........................................................................................ 117

7.12.2

7.13
7.14

7.15

7.16
7.17

7.18

Cycle Time Item Name and Measurement Signal Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ..118

CYCLE TIME SETTING SCREEN............................................................. 119


OPERATIONAL SITUATION SCREEN ..................................................... 120
7.14.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................120

7.14.2

Operational Situation Item Setting .......................................................................122

MANUAL OPERATION 2 SCREEN........................................................... 123


7.15.1

Screen Specification .............................................................................................123

7.15.2

Lamp and Button Area Setting - Setting Table (1/4, 2/4, 3/4) .............................124

7.15.3

Numeric Display Area and Motion Sequence Setting - Setting Table (4/4) ........125

OPERATION STATUS MONITOR SCREEN............................................. 126


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDANCE SCREEN ........................................... 128
7.17.1

Method of Alarm Code Transfer ..........................................................................130

7.17.2

Detailed Guidance Screen ....................................................................................131

FLOW DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN ................................................................. 133


7.18.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................133
7.18.1.1 Screen function ................................................................................................ 133
7.18.1.2 Method of alarm code transfer......................................................................... 136

c-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-66254EN/05

7.18.1.3
7.18.1.4
7.18.1.5
7.18.1.6

7.19

7.18.2

Fault Title and Presumed Cause Setting - Setting Table (1/4) .............................140

7.18.3

Flow Diagnostic Message Setting - Setting Table (2/4).......................................142

7.18.4

Image File Name and Detail Message Setting - Setting Table (3/4) ....................143

7.18.5

Button Area Setting - Setting Table (4/4).............................................................144

LOAD TORQUE MONITOR SCREEN....................................................... 145


7.19.1

7.20

7.21

7.23

7.24

Load Torque Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) .................................145

QUALITY CHECK SCREEN ...................................................................... 147


7.20.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................147

7.20.2

Quality Check PMC Ladder and Timing Chart....................................................149

7.20.3

Quality Check Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) .............................................150

CYCLE MONITOR SCREEN ..................................................................... 152


7.21.1

7.22

Method of flow diagnostic message creation................................................... 136


Detailed description screen.............................................................................. 137
Flow diagnosis continuation function after the power Is turned on again....... 137
Flow read function........................................................................................... 138

Cycle Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1).............................................152

SAFETY IO STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN ................................................. 153


7.22.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................153

7.22.2

Built-in Safety Logic Status Screen .....................................................................156

7.22.3

TR SAFETY I/O STATUS DISPLAY.................................................................158

7.22.4

Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/2).............................159

7.22.5

Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting Setting Table (2/2) ............................161

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREEN ...................................................... 163


7.23.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................163

7.23.2

Periodic Maintenance Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) .................................165

i MOTOR TEMPERATURE MONITOR SCREEN ................................... 166


7.24.1

Screen Configuration............................................................................................166

7.24.2

i Motor Temperature Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ..................168

MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL ........................................ 169


8.1
8.2

8.3

ENVIRONMENT, CONDITIONS, AND SETTING OF


THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL ....................................... 170
OPERATIONS OF THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL......... 171
8.2.1

Project Screen List Sheet......................................................................................172

8.2.2

Adding a Multi-Language Caption Setting Sheet ................................................174

8.2.3

Explanation of Displayed Multi-Language Caption Setting Sheet Functions......175

8.2.4

Multi-Language Display of a Project with Single-Language User Forms ...........176

ENTERING A MULTI-LANGUAGE CAPTION SETTING SHEET.............. 178


c-5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8.4

8.5
8.6
8.7

8.8

B-66254EN/05

8.3.1

FPAssist Multi-Language Setting Sheet...............................................................178

8.3.2

User Screen Multi-Language Setting Sheet .........................................................180

CHECKING DATA SETTINGS .................................................................. 181


8.4.1

NEED ...................................................................................................................181

8.4.2

ERROR.................................................................................................................181

8.4.3

WARNING...........................................................................................................181

8.4.4

OK

181

DATA REFLECTION IN FPASSIST........................................................... 182


CONTROL TO BE READ IN USER FORM ............................................... 183
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SCREEN SHEET LIST AND FORM
DATA ......................................................................................................... 184
8.7.1

Reread of an FPAssist Form.................................................................................185

8.7.2

Reread of a User Form .........................................................................................187

UPGRADING THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL................. 188

APPENDIX
A

DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS ......................................................... 191


A.1
A.2

ONE-BYTE CHARACTERS....................................................................... 192


TWO-BYTE CHARACTERS ...................................................................... 193
A.2.1

JIS Level 1............................................................................................................193

A.2.2

JIS Level 2............................................................................................................198

A.2.3

FANUC Special Characters..................................................................................199

LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING


ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN ................... 200

FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE .................... 204


C.1
C.2

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 205


DATA CREATION AND INPUT PROCEDURE.......................................... 206
C.2.1

Creating Display Information for Each Alarm/Information Required


for Diagnosis Flows..............................................................................................206

C.2.2

Input of Data into Excel Sheets ............................................................................208


C.2.2.1
C.2.2.2
C.2.2.3

C.3

Input of data into the fault diagnostic screen sheet.......................................... 208


Entering data in the flow diagnosis sheet ........................................................ 209
Enter data in the detailed description sheet...................................................... 211

CREATING FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES


FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY .......................................................... 212
C.3.1

Add Button for Multi-Language Setting Sheets...................................................212

C.3.2

Deleting Multi-Language Setting Sheets..............................................................213


c-6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-66254EN/05

C.3.3

METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA ......... 214


D.1
D.2
D.3

Input of Data into Multi-Language Setting Sheets...............................................213

FUNCTION OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 215


DATA STRUCTURE .................................................................................. 216
METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA
WITH THE FL-NET FUNCTION ................................................................ 218

OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP................................................. 223


E.1
E.2

PLC OPERATOR'S PANEL (N0080 TO N0254) ................................... 225


OPERATOR'S PANEL PLC (M0112 TO M0254) .................................. 231

c-7

1.OVERVIEW

B-66254EN/05

OVERVIEW
The operator's touch panel screen development tool (FANUC
PICTURE & FPAssist/A08B-9010-J513#ZZ11) for the Series 18i-LNA
/ Series 18i-LNB / Power Mate i-LNA consists of the two software
products list below. (See the next page.)
FANUC PICTURE
FPAssist
FANUC PICTURE is a tool for creating a machine operation screen on
the personal computer. FANUC PICTURE is used to set a screen layout
and graphical properties such as the locations, shapes and sizes of
components. For the standard screens for Toyota Motor, screen data
(screen template) created by FANUC PICTURE beforehand is
available, and is installed together with this tool.
FPAssist is a tool for setting properties such as the names, colors, and
PMC addresses of components (such as buttons and lamps) on a screen
created with FANUC PICTURE. FPAssist is based on MS Excel.
FPAssist allows a desired screen to be created by entering property
values in tables prepared on Excel sheets and combining the values
with a screen template. The standard screens for Toyota Motor can be
created simply by setting data with FPAssist. With FPAssist E3.00 and
later, screens can be created in English and Polish as well as in
Japanese.
In addition to allowing screens to be created in Japanese, English, and
Polish, which are the languages conventionally used for the
multi-language display function, Edition 7.00 and later of the operators
touch panel screen development tool FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist
(A08B-9010-J513#ZZ11) support creation of screens in Simplified
Chinese. The multi-language display function is available when the
Series 18i-LNB is used.
The actual languages that can be installed concurrently on a CNC are
Japanese, English, and a third language. The third language may be
selected from Polish and Simplified Chinese.
Note on use of FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist Edition 6.00 and
later
1. The multi-language display function is not supported for a
troubleshooting guidance screen. To create an operators panel
screen for multi-language display, install a flow diagnostic screen.

-1-

1.OVERVIEW

B-66254EN/05

Notes on use of FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist Edition 7.00 and


later
1. Upgrading of FPAssist for Excel 95 has been discontinued. The
functions related to Excel 95 and the relevant information in the
operators manual will therefore be phased out.
2. Screens in Simplified Chinese can be created by using FPAssist
for Excel 2000 and the multi-language batch input tool (running
on Excel 2000) for multi-language text input.
3. Edition 7.00 and later do not support Visual Basic-based creation
of user screens for Simplified Chinese display, nor do they support
composite screen display in Simplified Chinese.
Requirements of creation of screens in Simplified Chinese
1. Excel 2000 and Service Release Pack 3 or later
2. Arial Unicode MS font (included in Office 2000)
3. FEP software for Simplified Chinese text input (which should be
provided by the user who wants to use the FEP to input Simplified
Chinese text)

Screen creation tool (FANUC PICTURE)


Screen creation tool (FANUC PICTURE)
Locate components (such as buttons and
lamps) on the screen, and set their graphical
properties such as shapes, sizes, and positions.
CNC display unit

Screen template
(provided by FANUC)

Screen data
Screen creation
support tool (FPAssist)

Converted to
intermediate code

Memory card

Enter the properties (such as colors, display character strings, and


PMC addresses) of components (such as buttons and lamps)
located on the screen in Excel sheets, then combine the entered
properties with the screen template to create desired screen data.

-2-

2.SPECIFICATIONS

B-66254EN/05

SPECIFICATIONS

-3-

2.SPECIFICATIONS

2.1

B-66254EN/05

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
To use FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist, a personal computer with the
following operating environment is needed:
Operating software:
Windows 2000, XP (Windows for Pentium CPUs)
Application:
MS Excel 2000 (required to use FPAssist and multi-language
batch input tool)
Excel 2000 Service Release Pack 3 or later (required to use the
multi-language batch input tool)
MS Visual Basic 5.0 or 6.0 (required to use FANUC PICTURE)
or Visual Basic 5.0 Control Creation Edition SP2
Peripheral:
Memory card drive based on the PCMCIA specifications

-4-

2.SPECIFICATIONS

B-66254EN/05

2.2

SCREENS CREATABLE WITH THE TOOL


With the tool, the screens listed in the table below can be created. The
table also indicates the number of screens that can be created with one
system.

No.

Screen name

1
2

Fault display screen


Manual operation screen

Manual operation 2 screen

NC operation screen

Number of creatable screens

16
17
18

Only one screen can be created.


Multiple screens can be created.
One screen is always created.

19

Load torque monitor screen

One screen is always created.

20

User-created screen(main)

Multiple screens can be created.

21

Quality check screen

One screen is always created.

22

Cycle monitor screen

One screen is always created.

23

Safety IO status display screen


Built-in safety logic status
screen
TR safety I/O status screen

Each one screen is always


created.

24

Periodic maintenance screen

One screen is always created.

25

i motor temperature monitor


screen

One screen is always created.

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

LNA

LNB

PMiLNA

FPAssist
Version

(Note)

Multiple screens can be created.


Multiple screens can be created.
Multiple screens can be created
(with some restrictions).
Two screens can be created
(with some restrictions).

Tool exchange counter 1


screen
Tool exchange counter 2
screen
Tool compensation counter
screen
Running display screen
Running display 2 screen
Fault count screen
Cycle time measurement
screen
Cycle time setting screen
Operational situation screen
Operation status monitor
screen
Troubleshooting guidance
screen
Flow diagnostic screen
User-created screen(sub)
Version display screen

Series 18i-

One of these two screens can be


created.

Note 1
Note 2

Only one screen can be created.


Multiple screens can be created.
Multiple screens can be created.
Only one screen can be created.

Note 3

Only one screen can be created.

Note 4

Only one screen can be created.


Only one screen can be created.

Note 7

Multiple screens can be created.


Only one screen can be created.

-5-

Note 6
Note 5
Note 8
Version
4.05
Version
Note 5
5.10
Version
Note 9
5.10
Version
Note 10
5.10
Version 5.10
Version 5.50
Version 5.50
Version
5.30
Version
5.30

2.SPECIFICATIONS

B-66254EN/05

NOTE
1 A tool exchange counter is built into the operator's touch panel. So, no counter
needs to be prepared on the PMC. These screens can be created simply by setting
count trigger addresses in an Excel sheet. Registers for setting pre-forecast values,
forecast values, and limit values are also built into the operator's panel.
2 The tool compensation counter screen directly displays the registers in the CNC. So,
no registers need to be provided on the PMC.
3 An alarm count measurement and abnormal stop time measurement are made using
the operator's touch panel. Measurement values for the past six years including the
current date are stored.
4 A cycle time counter is built into the operator's touch panel. So, no cycle time
counter needs to be prepared on the PMC. These screens can be created simply by
setting a count start address and count end address in an Excel sheet. A reference
value and measurement values for ten times are stored.
5 By selecting the screen type, user-created screen, a screen close to the standard
screen can be created and registered in the screen switch menu with FANUC
PICTURE.
6 When using FANUC PICTURE E2.00 and later, use the flow diagnostic screen
basically. The flow diagnostic screen has a CNC fault diagnosis flow incorporated.
The flow diagnostic screen displays a CNC diagnosis message when a CNC alarm
is issued.
7 When the operational situation screen is used, the fault count screen, the cycle time
measurement screen, and the cycle time setting screen are also required.
8 A version display screen is created automatically by the system, regardless of the
setting. This screen displays the name of an operator's panel, the version of screen
data, the version of FANUC PICTURE, and so forth. This screen is displayed on the
operator's panel screen immediately after the power is turned on. (This function is
available with E2.00 and later.)
9 The tool exchange counter screen is required. Moreover, the FANUC PMC is
required.
10 When a cycle monitor screen is created, a cycle time measurement screen and
cycle time setting screen cannot be created.
Only the former screen or the latter screens can be created at a time. FPAssist
Version 6.04 and later support switching between these screens to enable only
either of them to be used on a CNC.

-6-

2.SPECIFICATIONS

B-66254EN/05

2.3

RESTRICTIONS
The types of characters that can be displayed on a screen for Japanese
and singly-byte code display are limited to a range of characters that
can be used with the C language executor. For details, see Appendix A,
DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS. The following shows the
character sizes usable for Japanese and single-byte code display, and
those for Simplified Chinese display.
Japanese and single-byte code display
Type of
character

Numeric
character

Half size
Full size
Double
height and
width size
6x size

Alphabetic
character, symbol
LowerUppercase
case

Hiragana,
kanji

Katakana

: Displayable
X : Not displayable

NOTE
For full-size characters, specify S-JIS as the
character code setting.
Simplified Chinese display
Type of
character

Numeric
character

Half size
Full size
Double
height and
width size
6x size

Alphabetic
character, symbol
LowerUppercase
case

Hiragana,
kanji

Katakana

NOTE
For full-size characters, specify Unicode as the
character code setting.
When the CNC control unit is in Simplified Chinese display mode, a
machine operators panel may also provide Simplified Chinese display.
If the CNC control unit is in Japanese display mode, for example,
Simplified Chinese characters cannot be displayed properly on an
operators panel screen. To set a different display language, the CNC
control unit must be turned off and then back on.
-7-

2.SPECIFICATIONS

B-66254EN/05

Restrictions on creation of screens in Simplified Chinese


[Important]
To create screens in Simplified Chinese, use only the FPAssist tool and
multi-language batch input tool.
With a Japanese version of Visual Basic, S-JIS character codes are used
for character processing. This means that when captions are input with
Simplified Chinese codes (international codes), some of the Simplified
Chinese codes cause their characters to be garbled. If the screen form
file containing this data is saved as-is, the file is processed with the
garbled characters still included, resulting in recurrence of the garbled
characters on a machine operators panel screen. You must therefore
not use Visual Basic to create machine operators panel screens in
Simplified Chinese.

Visual Basic-based screen editing (user screen creation) is not


supported.

Composite screens display in Simplified Chinese is not supported.


To collect bitmaps from a machine operators panel screen in
Simplified Chinese, use the Ethernet-connected CNC screen display
function.

2.4

SETTING ON THE CNC SIDE


The following parameters must be set on the CNC to enable a screen
created with the tool to be displayed on the CNC display unit:
Parameter
No.

Parameter value
Series 18i-LNA / PMi-LNA
Series 18i-LNB

8661
8662
8781

58
4
92

251
4
120

To enable Simplified Chinese display, the Simplified Chinese display


option is required.

-8-

2.SPECIFICATIONS

B-66254EN/05

2.5

CREATING A SCREEN IN A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN


JAPANESE
FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist E3.00 and later support screens in
English and Polish. By setting the output language setting field in
[Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration], you can choose
a language used for screen display from Japanese, English, and Polish.
A screen created using FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist includes fixed
characters output by FPAssist as well as characters entered by the user.
By the setting described above, the language used for fixed characters
output by FPAssist can be switched.
FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist E6.00 and later enable concurrent
installation of Japanese, English, and Polish on machine operators
panel screens. Which language is used for screen display is determined
by the display language parameter settings on the CNC control unit
side.
FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist E7.00 and later enable concurrent
installation of up to three languages of your choice on machine
operators panel screens: Japanese, English, and a third language (either
Polish or Simplified Chinese). Which language is used for screen
display is determined by the display language parameter settings on the
CNC control unit side.

2.6

I/O DEDICATED TO THE OPERATOR'S PANEL


An operator's touch panel created using FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist
uses 48 bits from M0112.0 to M0117.7 in the M-NET interface area
(M/N) between the CNC and PMC as an internal work area. So, this
area is dedicated to the operator's panel, and must not be used for any
other purposes.

-9-

2.SPECIFICATIONS

2.7

B-66254EN/05

INDICATOR DISPLAY WHEN THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY


FUNCTION (TWO-SCREEN DISPLAY) IS USED
While the CNC is connected with a personal computer via Ethernet,
and the CNC screen is displayed on the personal computer with the
dual display capability of the CNC screen display function, an indicator
for indicating which of the CNC and personal computer is operating the
screen is displayed in the upper-left corner of the operator's panel
screen. By touching the area where the indicator appears, you can
switch between the NC and personal computer to operate the screen.
When the indicator shows "PC", touching this indicator area on the
screen on the NC side changes the indicator to "NC", allowing
operations to be performed from the touch panel on the NC. When the
indicator indicates "NC", clicking this indicator area on the screen on
the personal computer side changes the indicator to "PC", allowing
operations to be performed from the personal computer.
This function is available starting with overall edition E5.00 of FANUC
PICTURE&FPAssist.
Indication
PC
NC

- 10 -

Key input user


Personal computer side
CNC control unit side

2.SPECIFICATIONS

B-66254EN/05

2.8

BUTTON AND LAMP SIGNAL DISPLAY FUNCTION


By setting the PMC parameters for M-NET interface control, signal
information related to touched buttons and lamps can be displayed in a
popup window.
This function is available starting with overall edition E5.00 of FANUC
PICTURE & FPAssist.
When K08.0 is set to 1, a popup
window as shown is displayed while an
operation button is pressed.

K08

Bit

Symbol

K08.0

P.SDSP

K08.1

P.NACT

1
Button
operation
disable
P.NACT

0
Signal
address
display
P.SDSP

Detailed description
Set this bit to 1 to display the signals set for button control and lamp
control.
CAUTION:
The signal set with an interlocked button cannot be displayed.
Valid when K08.0 = 1. Set this bit to 1 to disable button control
operation.
CAUTION:
When this signal is set to 1, screen switch button operation is
also disabled. This means that screen display cannot be
switched from the operator's panel screen to other screens such
as the CNC screen. As a countermeasure, install an external
switch or create a ladder circuit that turns off K08.1 automatically
with a timer when a certain time has elapsed.

- 11 -

2.SPECIFICATIONS

2.9

B-66254EN/05

MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN AND 5- BUTTON MENU


Numeric display subscreen button of manual operation screen was
changed from Edition7.09 of FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist to the
layout as shown in the figure below.
This allows the 5-button menu and the numeric display subscreen
buttons to exist together, thereby enabling a maximum of 20 display
subscreen buttons to be registered.

- 12 -

3.INSTALLING THE TOOL

B-66254EN/05

INSTALLING THE TOOL

- 13 -

3.INSTALLING THE TOOL

3.1

B-66254EN/05

INSTALLING Microsoft Visual Basic


First, install Microsoft Visual Basic in the personal computer. For
installation, execute Setup. For details, refer to the manual of Visual
Basic.

CAUTION
1 Users of Visual Basic Version 5.0 Control Creation Edition must associate installed
VB5.0 CCE with the file extension VBP (register the file type). The executable file
name is VB5CCE.EXE.
2 If you attempt to open a project created with VB6.0 with VB5.0 for screen editing, the
error shown below occurs. Click OK to proceed to load the project. Alternatively,
before starting to edit with VB5.0, open the "project-name.VBP" file on a text editor,
delete the single line that starts with the key indicated in the dialog box (in this case,
"Retained="), and open the project for screen editing.

- 14 -

3.INSTALLING THE TOOL

B-66254EN/05

3.2

INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist

3.2.1

INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist / (A08B-9010-J513


#ZZ11)
1.
2.

When the CD-ROM of the product is inserted into the CD-ROM


drive, installation is automatically started. Perform installation
according to the dialog messages displayed.
If installation is not automatically started by step 1 above, activate
DISK1\SETUP.EXE in drive D (CD-ROM drive) directly.
This method of activation can be executed by reading drive A in
the description of installation on the floppy disk product as drive
D and specifying DISK1 folder.
<1> Click Run on the Start menu of Windows.
<2> Enter D:\Disk1\Setup.exe in Open.
<3> Click OK to start setup operation.

Proceed to perform installation according to the messages


displayed in dialog boxes.
<4> Upon completion of setup operation, the desktop displays a
shortcut icon for FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist.

The dialog boxes that appear during the installation are described
below.
The following dialog box can be used to select a display language that
is used for installation and associated with FANUC PICTURE &
FPAssist. When Windows is set to use Japanese, Japanese is
automatically selected. Otherwise, English is selected.

- 15 -

3.INSTALLING THE TOOL

B-66254EN/05

The following dialog box can be used to select the type of a tool for
assisting machine operator's panel screen creation (FPAssist) to be
installed

FPAssist edition to select


Language used
in Windows
Non-Japanese
(e.g. English)

Edition of FPAssist and display


language
Excel2000 edition (English display)
Excel2000 edition (Japanese display)
Excel95 edition (Japanese display)

Japanese
Both of Excel2000 and Excel95
editions (Japanese display)

Selected when
Windows is set to use non-Japanese.
Windows is set to use Japanese. Either or both of
Excel95 and Excel2000 are selected according to
the version of MS Excel to use. However, when you
want to use Excel2000 edition (English display),
check Toyota Motor Corporation's thoughts on this
matter.
In FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist Edition 7.00 and
later, upgrading of FPAssist for Excel 95 has
been discontinued.

To use the multi-language display function, you must select


Excel2000.
- 16 -

3.INSTALLING THE TOOL

B-66254EN/05

3.2.2

Initializing the Add-in Tools for Excel2000


When FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist is re-installed, and the install
folder is specified in a location different from the previous location, the
storage locations of the add-in macros used by the FPAssist tool and
multi-language batch input tool operating on Excel2000 must be
changed. The current version of Microsoft Excel cannot, however,
automatically change the location of this add-in macro. Thus, this
subsection explains the procedure for changing it. Strictly speaking,
there are cases in which the procedure for "initializing the add-in tool"
is not necessary, but to explain this accurately would make things even
more difficult. Regardless of whether initialization is necessary or not,
the Excel tool can be operated normally subsequently by following the
procedure described below.
<1> Start Excel 2000.
<2> In the menu bar, click [Tool]-[Add In] to display the Add In
dialog box.

<3> If the Add In dialog box contains "Mlt_Fpassist", go to <4>.


Otherwise, go to <5>.

Look at this

<4> Check the "Mlt_Fpassist" check box. If the dialog box shown
below is displayed, click [Yes]. Otherwise, go to <5>.

- 17 -

3.INSTALLING THE TOOL

B-66254EN/05

<5> If the Add In dialog box contains "Fpamlt", go to <6>. Otherwise,


go to <7>.

<6> Check the "Fpamlt" check box. If the dialog box shown below is
displayed, click [Yes]. Otherwise, go to <7>.

<7> Click the [Cancel] button to end the procedure.

CAUTION : Important
To use the Excel tool provided by FANUC PICTURE
& FPAssist, set the security level for macro
execution to Medium.
Click [Tools], point to [Macro], and then click
[Security]. In the [Security Level] tab, select
~Medium.

- 18 -

3.INSTALLING THE TOOL

B-66254EN/05

3.3

UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist


This section describes how to uninstall FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist.
It is a good idea to perform this uninstallation procedure before
reinstalling FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist.

On the [Start] menu, click [Settings] and then click [Control


Panel]. In the Control Panel, double-click [Add/Remove Program]
and then click the [Install/Uninstall] tab.

Click [FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist].

Click the Add/Remove button.

Follow the dialog messages to continue the uninstallation procedure.

- 19 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

USING FANUC PICTURE

- 20 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

4.1

ACTIVATING FANUC PICTURE


To activate FANUC PICTURE, double-click the icon for FANUC
PICTURE & FPAssist. The following menu appears:

The function of each menu item is indicated below.


Menu item
New Project
Open Project
Setting of project
Edit Project
Assistant
Multi input

Make MEM

Write to card

Function
This item is used to create a new project. This item is also used to restore a project from
screen data that is saved from the machine operator's panel with the batch save function.
A new folder is created, and Visual Basic is activated.
This item is used to select an already created project for editing. (This item does not
activate Visual Basic but is used to make a selection only.)
This item enables or disables the multi-language display function. The item is also used to
make settings such as the method of changing the displayed language. When using the
batch tool, check the "The Multi-language display function is used." check button.
This item allows you to edit a project selected with Open Project after Visual Basic is
activated.
This item activates the screen creation support tool (FPAssist).
This item starts the multi-language batch tool.
This item creates screen data to be read into the CNC. A memory card file named
Cex0fpdt.mem is created. The boot function of the CNC is used for incorporation into the
CNC.
Usually, a file created with Make MEM includes not only screen data but also all files that
are needed to create screen data and are compressed. By creating a new project based
on these files, the project with which screen data was created can be restored, and
screen editing and addition can be performed.
Clicking this button while holding down the Ctrl key does not create data for project
restoration. Use this item to save data processing time at the stage of screen data
debugging.
This item is used to copy screen data created with Make MEM and the FP driver for
displaying such screen data to the memory card.

- 21 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

Menu item

Function

HELP

This item enables you to combine component screens such as button screens and lamp
screens created with FPAssist into a single screen to be displayed on the machine
operator's panel. This item also enables you to check the layout on the personal
computer. With the Print Screen key, you can take an entire screen from the clipboard
into Paintbrush or a WORD document.
FPAssist for Excel95 V2.11 or earlier can be upgraded to the FPAssist version that is
currently installed. This menu button has the same function as the V-UP button of
FPAssist. Before using this button, select a project to be edited with Open Project.
This item displays the positions of buttons and lamps and property settings on a
screen-by-screen (form-by-form) basis. These data items can also be output to a file.
This item displays descriptions of objects and properties.

EXIT

This item exits from FANUC PICTURE.

Composite Screen

Assistant V-UP
List

CAUTION
1 Note that clicking Make MEM while holding down the Ctrl key does not create
data for screen data restoration. Usually, do not press the Ctrl key.

- 22 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

You may have installed two FPAssist editions for Excel95 and
Excel2000 on your Windows that has been set to use Japanese. Even in
this case, you can call the appropriate Excel selectively with a single
click of the Assistant menu button because the edition in use is
automatically identified according to the open project. To enable this,
register the paths of Excel95 and Excel2000 execution files, as
described below. This setting for Excel2000 is also enabled with the
Multi input menu button.
Right-click here on the title bar. The pull-down menu as shown
below appears. Choose [Excel Information] to specify the directories
containing Excel execution programs.

- 23 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

[Excel95] and [Excel2000]:


Set the execution program names and the full paths to the folders
in which execution programs have been installed. After making
this setting, the Assistant button can start the appropriate Excel
version by automatically identifying Excel for the FPAssist
edition.
[Project Information]:
You can check the Excel version by which FPAssist for the
project currently selected has been created.
[Excel95] and [Excel2000] (buttons):
You can manually switch from Excel95 to Excel2000.

CAUTION
Do not switch from Excel2000 to Excel95.
Otherwise, the program does not work properly.

- 24 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

4.2

PROCEDURE FOR SCREEN CREATION

4.2.1

Procedure for Creating Standard Screens for Toyota Motor


The procedure for creating an operator's panel screen with FANUC
PICTURE & FPAssist is indicated below.
When creating a new
operator's panel
screen

When restoring a project from


data saved in a batch from the
CNC

When editing operator's panel


screen data existing on the
personal computer

Acti vate FANUC PICTURE.

Acti vate FANUC PICTURE.

Acti vate FANUC PICTURE.

Create a new project with


New Project.

Create a new project with


New Project.

Select an existing project


with Open Project.

Select Get from Template in


the Expand file dialog box.

Select Get from MEM File in


the Expand file dialog box.

Acti vate FPAssist and set


screen data with Assistant.

With Make MEM, convert


the data to data capable of
being downloaded to the
CNC.
Write the screen data to a
memory card with Write to
card .

Download the screen data


from the memory card to the
CNC.

- 25 -

Check and print an operator's


panel screen created with
Composite Screen on the
personal computer.

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

4.2.2

B-66254EN/05

Procedure for Creating Screens That Support Multi-Language


Display Switching

Create a new project


(See Subsections 4.2.1 and
4.3.1.)

Setting of Project
Make settings in the Select
Language dialog box
(See Subsection 4.3.3.)

Include a standard screen for


Toyota Motor in a language set
as the output language with
Assistant. (See Chapter 7.)
Create flow diagnostic
messages in four languages
according to Appendix C.3.

Create and edit a user screen


with Edit Project.
(See Subsection 4.3.4.)

With Multi Input, captions in all


three languages can be set at a
time. Write multi-language
captions to screens.
(See Chapter 8.)

The following steps are the


same as those in Subsection
4.2.1:
Composite Screen
(See Subsection 4.3.9.)
Make MEM
(See Subsection 4.3.7.)
Write to card
(See Subsection 4.3.8.)
Download the screen data to the
CNC. (See Chapter 5.)

Basically, screens are created according to the procedure described in


Subsection 4.2.1. To support multi-language display, add the steps
indicated by shading in the figure to the left.
Check the "The Multi-language display function is used." property.
Multi-language data can be created in up to four languages: English, Japanese,
Polish, and Simplified Chinese. Three of these languages can be selected as
display languages, including Japanese, English, and either of the remaining
two languages. When you check this property, the default settings for the
multi-language display function, which are described below, take effect.

Creation in three languages including English, Japanese, and


Polish
2
The display language on the operator's panel is determined by the
display language parameter settings of the CNC.

Japanese if bit 0 of parameter No. 3102 is set to 1

Polish if bit 2 of parameter No. 3190 is set to 1

Chinese if bit 6 of parameter No. 3190 is set to 1


If none of the above parameter conditions is satisfied, a screen is
displayed in English, which is the initial default, or a language you set
as the default.
CNC flow diagnostic messages are indicated only in Japanese and
English, which is set when a language other than Japanese is selected.
Machine flow data can be set in up to four languages (Japanese, English,
Polish, and Chinese).
You should actually set machine flow data for language sheets selected
with Setting of project for language output.
Project editing is required only when a user screen is created.
Although captions for multi-language display may be created in this
editing step, FANUC recommends that Multi INput be used.
Multi-language batch input sets captions in the sheets for a language
selected with Setting of project as an output language. When a screen is
re-created (converted) with FPAssist, select all sheets and click the
Write button to reset multi-language captions with the multi-language
batch input tool.

CAUTION:Important
After standard screen captions created with
FPAssist have been read into batch input Excel
sheets, you should use Min input to modify the
captions or add new ones. Even if the captions in
FPAssist sheets have been changed, these captions
are overwritten with multi-language captions written
by batch input.

- 26 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

4.3

SETTING A MENU FUNCTION

4.3.1

CREATING A NEW PROJECT


Create a new project according to the procedure below.
<1> Click New Project on the menu.
A dialog box for entering a project name appears.

<2> Click ... to display the Browse for Folder dialog box.

<3> Select a folder where to create a project, then click OK.


The selected folder name is set in Directory Name.

- 27 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

<4> Enter a desired project name in Project Name, then click OK.
<5> In the dialog box indicated below, you can select from:
a) Creating a new project.
b) Restoring a project from existing screen data (MEM file)
When creating a new project, click the radio button for Get from
Template. When restoring a project from existing screen data,
click the radio button for Get from MEM File.

When Get from Template is selected


Select this option when creating a new machine operator's panel screen.
When both FPAssist for Excel95 and that for Excel200 have been
installed, you can select the edition to use for the development. When
you click OK, a new project is created, and Visual Basic is activated.
Under a folder specified in Directory Name, a folder named according
to Project Name is created, and those files that are needed for machine
operator's panel screen development are copied into the folder.
Subfolders automatically created and their purposes are described
below. The files under these subfolders are compressed and saved
together with screen data at MEM creation time.
\PhotoData:
Subfolder where image data files to be displayed on the fault
detail screen of the troubleshooting guidance screen or the flow
diagnostic screen is placed
\UserFrm:
When creating a user-created screen with FANUC PICTURE, a
form file is placed in this subfolder. The pattern form
(FANUC.frm) for user screen creation is copied. Create a
necessary dedicated screen (form) based on the pattern form with
Microsoft Visual Basic, and save the created screen in this folder
according to the form alias save method.

- 28 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

When Get from MEM File is selected


Select this option when restoring a project from existing screen data
(MEM file). This option is used, for example, to edit screen data saved
from the CNC with the batch backup function of the CNC.
Clicking OK displays a file dialog box for selecting a project
restoration source file named CEX0FPDT.nnn (nnn: Number starting
with 000, or MEM). Specify a desired MEM file. Clicking Open
expands the file compressed and stored in the MEM file, and copies the
file into the project folder. From this file, the project with which the
selected screen data was created can be restored.

When the operator's panel screen for the restored project has been
created for multi-language display, the dialog box below appears,
prompting you to start the tool for creating an Excel sheet for
multi-language batch input. Click the desired button.
Normally, you should click the Yes button to create an Excel sheet for
multi-language batch input. For an explanation of operations of the
multi-language batch input tool, see Chapter 8, MULTI-LANGUAGE
BATCH INPUT TOOL.

- 29 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

4.3.2

B-66254EN/05

OPENING A PROJECT
This function is used to select a project already created.
Click Open Project on the menu. The Open dialog box appears. Select
a project file (xxx.fpp) in the desired project folder, then click Open.

At this stage, just specify a desired project folder and project file name
only.
Actual editing is performed using Edit Project and Assistant.

4.3.3

Setting a Project
Set items common to an entire project.
When a new project has been created, a setting is made to disable the
multi-language display function. When you check the check box below
to select the multi-language display function, the multi-language default
settings below are applied.

Selection of
multi-language function
Method of switching
Multi-language display
No.
Select

01

02

03

04

The Multi-language display function is used. (Unchecked)


~ The display language parameter of CNC is used. (Dimmed to indicate
unavailability)
Multi-language key
Param bit
Comment
Select font of Ank
Single byte code and
ENG
Default
English
Japanese
Single byte code and
JPN
3102#0
Japanese,3102#0
Japanese
Single byte code and
POL
3190#2
Polish,3190#2
Japanese
CHI
3190#6
Chinese,3190#6
Simplified Chinese

Uncheck "The Multi-language display function is used. to create


machine operator's panel screens in one language only, which is the
FPAssist output language.
Check "The Multi-language display function is used. to enable
multi-language display or to create machine operator's panel screens in
Chinese only. The above radio button becomes no longer dimmed, and
the default settings listed in the above table take effect.
Normally, you need not change these language settings.
- 30 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

The machine tool builder should make only the two settings below.
1. Select: Select multiple languages for display on the operator's
panel.
2. Param bit: When a different display language is newly set as the
default, reset the parameter bit for the old language.

Setting of Multi-language
When the [Setting of project] button is clicked, a dialog box as shown
below appears.
This dialog box is used to make settings related to multiple languages.
According to the FPAssist output language, language keys are already
registered in Nos. 01 to 04. (No01=English, 02=Japanese, 03=Polish,
04=Chinese)
When you want to edit a language key already registered, double-click
the number of the key in the No column. A dialog box for editing
appears.
Select "Simplified Chinese in "Select font of Ank only for Simplified
Chinese display; do not select this option for the other languages.

The Multi-language display function is used. :


To use the multi-language display function for a FPAssist or user
form screen, check this item. If this item is not checked, the batch
tool cannot be used.
Method of switching Multi-language display
Select one of the following two methods for changing the display
language on the CNC display:
- 31 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

The display language parameter of CNC is used. :


To use the same parameter bits as the language bits of language
parameter Nos. 3102, 3119 and 3190 of the CNC to switch
between languages prepared for the FPAssist or user form screen,
select this option button.
The FPAssist screen or user form screen can be synchronized in
the same language as on the CNC screen, but changing the
language causes a power disconnection alarm.
The Multi-language display switch signal is used.(1Byte) :
When switching between display languages prepared for the
FPAssist screen or user form screen is to be made by writing a
language number associated with a display language in the PMC
signal area, select this option button. When selecting this option,
set the PMC area and PMC address shown below. In PMC ladders,
a language number registered for a language key is written in the
interface area to switch between languages. When 0 or a language
number not registered is written, the default language is assumed.
PMC Area, PMC Address :
When selecting "The Multi-language display switch signal is
used.(1Byte)" explained above, specify the type of the PMC signal
area and its address to allocate the PMC signal area (1 byte).
Add button :
A new language key is added. When editing an existing language
key, double-click No.
Delete button :
An existing language key is deleted. However, language keys Nos.
1 to 4 cannot be deleted.
Remark :
This item is automatically set when a key has been added. You
cannot change this item. This item is used as a suffix to identify a
language associated with FANUC PICTURE.
ANK :
This item indicates the display font used when the character type
of ANK is selected for a registered language key.
The letters indicate font selections as shown below.
J: Single-byte code and Japanese font
C: Simplified Chinese font

- 32 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

Select language
In this dialog box, select display languages you want to install on the
machine operator's panel, from the default language settings: English,
Japanese, Polish, and Chinese.

Select:
Check languages to install on the machine operator's panel. For
Polish or Chinese, check Option and then select the desired
language in the Select Option box.
Default:
Select one language as the default from the selected languages,
which is used if no bits are found to be on in the display language
parameters for the machine operator's panel.
Language change setting
When you click the Add button in the Setting of Multi-language tab or
double-click the number in the No column for a key you want to change,
you can register additional keys or edit data.

- 33 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

Select :
Specify whether to perform language display of a registered
language key. To perform language display, check this item.
Multi-language key :
Specify a character string to distinguish the registered language.
The character string must consist of up to 20 characters and cannot
contain any space.
Comment :
You can provide a comment on the language key with up to 40
characters.
Default display language :
The default language key is set. The default is already set to
No1.
Param bit :
Parameter setting applied when the display language is changed
by using display language parameters of the CNC. If this
parameter bit is 1, switching to this language is made. If the
parameter bits of registered language keys are all set to 0, the
default language is used for display. If the default setting is not
found, the language registered at the beginning is used for display.
Reset this parameter bit for the language that is no longer used as
the default display language for the machine operator's panel. See
the comment, which contains the parameter number and bit
number.
Number :
A language number applied when multi-language display
switching is performed by signal. A language number that matches
a number in the PMC area is used for display. If no number
matches, or if number 0 (default language) is not found, the
language registered at the beginning is used for display.
Select font of Ank:
When the scaling factor for characters in FPAssist is 1 or ANK is
selected as the character type property of controls of FANUC
PICTURE, specify the font type for full-size characters. To create
screens in Chinese, select "Simplified Chinese. To create screens
in any of the other languages, select "Single byte code and
Japanese.

CAUTION
While FPAssist is open, never set a project.
When you have set a project during FPAssist
editing, re-open FPAssist. This is also true for the
multi-language batch input tool.

- 34 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

4.3.4

EDITING A PROJECT
This function is used to create an operator's panel screen that is other
than the standard screens for Toyota Motor and is dedicated to a
machine tool builder. A project folder includes a subfolder named
UserFrm, and this subfolder includes a pattern form named
FANUC.frm. From the pattern form, create an operator's panel screen
dedicated to a machine tool builder. Create a form with the same name
as a user screen name set in [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen
registration] of FPAssist. (Example: If user-created screen name =
"USER1" is set with FPAssist, create a subscreen named USER1.frm.)
In the new form, create a subscreen to be called from this screen. For
the screen creation method using FANUC PICTURE, refer to "FANUC
PICTURE (Windows) Operator's Manual (B-66244EN)".

4.3.5

ACTIVATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL


(FPAssist)
With FPAssist, the twenty-seven types of standard screens for Toyota
Motor described in Section 2.2, "SCREENS CREATABLE WITH THE
TOOL" can be created without using the screen editor function of
FANUC PICTURE.
When you click the Assistant button on the menu, MS Excel is
activated, and the FPAssist work book is opened in the Excel window.
Before FPAssist is activated, a target project must be selected using the
New Project or Open Project button on the menu. (Note: Before
FPAssist can be used, MS Excel Version 7.0 or MS Excel2000 must be
installed on the personal computer.)
FPAssist consists of multiple work sheets. When FPAssist is activated
for the first time, the whole setting work sheet opens. The whole setting
work sheet includes operation buttons for registering and deleting
machine operator's panel screens and for menu button reassignment, a
conversion button for creating screen data from data set in a work sheet,
and so forth.
For the method of using FPAssist, see Chapter 6.

FPAssist whole setting work sheet

- 35 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

4.3.6

B-66254EN/05

Multi-Language Batch Input


This menu button is used to set a list of all multi-language captions in
all forms for a project at a time. For details, see Chapter 8,
"MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL".

4.3.7

Creating Memory Card Format Data


Convert FANUC PICTURE screen data created with FPAssist to
memory card format data according to the procedure below. For a
second MEM creation and later, the previous settings are displayed.
Click Make MEM.
The Making memory card file dialog box appears.

When Model A (Series 18i-LNA, Power Mate i-LNA) is used, select


SB6 as the PMC model in the PMC type pull-down list box. When
Model B (Series 18i-LNB) is used, select SB7.
Select the FPSTRTUP screen from the Start-up screen pull-down list
box. This screen is used to display the versions of the software products
related to the machine operator's panel. So, be sure to select
FPSTRTUP.
Double-click RETURN in the form file list in the lower area of the
dialog box. The Setting user screen dialog box appears.

- 36 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

Select SYSTEM-[i] C Executor in the Screen Number pull-down list


box.
In Key Caption, set the character string OPER to be displayed as a soft
key on the CNC screen.
Check the check box of Select flag to enable calling from the CNC
screen.
Click OK to return to the Making memory card file dialog box.
Click OK in the Making memory card file dialog box to create memory
card format data. When a memory card format file named
Cex0fpdt.mem is created, the message "A memory card file has been
created normally." is displayed.
Clicking Detail in the Making memory card file dialog box enables
options to be set when screen data is created.
The option setting functions are available starting with overall edition
E5.00 of FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist.
Optional functions
Signal Display Setting

NoAction Color Setting

Outline
This option sets the function described in Section
2.8.
The setting of this optional function cannot be
changed.
With this option, the color of a disabled button
(embedded) among the actuator operation buttons
on operation screens can be changed to a color
specified here.

Signal Display Setting dialog box

- 37 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

NoAction Color Setting dialog box

Noaction color is changed.: Check box


Check this check box to change the background color of a
disabled actuator button.
Color Select: Button
When this button is pressed, the color setting dialog box appears.
Select a desired color by clicking the mouse.

- 38 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

4.3.8

COPYING OPERATOR'S PANEL SCREEN DATA AND THE FP


DRIVER TO A MEMORY CARD
Copy operator's panel screen data (CEX0FPDT.MEM) held on the
personal computer and the FP driver (INTFPCEX.MEM) to a memory
card according to the procedure below.
The data files CEX1MCAL.MEM and CEX2NCAL.MEM for flow
diagnosis is also copied at the same time.
Click Write to card.
The Write to card dialog box appears.

The file name (CEX0FPDT.MEM), creation date, and file size of


screen data created using Make MEM are displayed. Check the creation
date.
Specify a screen data transfer destination. In this case, be sure to
specify the memory card drive. MEM data is transferred to the root
directory of the memory card drive.
Usually, only screen data needs to be copied. When the FP driver also
needs to be copied, however, check the check box for Transfer driver
file for FANUC PICTURE.
For screen data for the Series 18i-LNA/Power Mate i-LNA, "Transfer
driver file for MODEL i-A:" is checked. For screen data for the Series
18i-LNB, "Transfer driver file for MODEL i-B:" is checked. (Based on
model information set with FPAssist, the necessary driver side is
automatically checked.)
[Tip]The FP driver needs to be copied in one of three cases:
<1> When screen data is read into the CNC for the first time
<2> When the FP driver is upgraded to the latest version
<3> After replacement and initialization of the F-ROM of the
CNC
Clicking OK executes copy operation.

- 39 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

CAUTION
1 If screens added with the Series 18i-LNB are not
used, the driver for MODEL i-A can be used also
with the Series 18i-LNB. If this type of usage is
selected, data held on the operator's panel such as
tool exchange counter data and fault count data
needs to be erased when screen data including
added screen data dedicated to the Series 18i-LNB
is created and installed on the CNC later on. So,
care must be taken.
2 When screen data is written to the CNC with the
function for batch restoration from the memory card,
all files in the root directory of the memory card are
written to the FROM of the CNC. So, ensure that no
unnecessary files are present under the root
directory. (Subfolders may be present.)

4.3.9

COMPOSITE SCREEN DISPLAY


When a machine operator's panel screen is created with FPAssist, its
constituent screens (subscreens) such as a lamp screen, button screen,
and menu screen are created separately one by one. With the composite
screen display function, these subscreens can be combined for display
on the personal computer. The same screen as actually displayed on the
machine operator's panel can be checked on the screen of the personal
computer.

CAUTION
FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist Edition 7.00 does not
support composite screen display in Simplified
Chinese.

- 40 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

4.3.9.1

Operation for Composite Screen Display


Click the Composite Screen button. The dialog box shown below
appears.

When you click the [Base Screen] pull-down list box, a list of screens
(base screens) making up a machine operator's panel is displayed.

Among these screens, the screens other than MENU_P0 are the base
screens that make up a machine operator's panel. These screen names
are already set on the whole setting work sheet of FPAssist. In Sub
Screens 1 through 5, the subscreens specified under a base screen are
displayed. If a subscreen is switchable to the next screen with the
screen switch button, a list of subscreen names is displayed in the
pull-down list box of the subscreen as in the case of a base screen.
<1> Select a desired base screen from the list box.
- 41 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

<2> Select a subscreen in Sub Screens 1 through 5 to determine a


subscreen configuration.
<3> By clicking the Entry button, register the selected screen
configuration. The registered screen configuration can be checked
using the pull-down list box.
<4> By clicking the Delete button, a registered screen configuration
can be deleted. Select a desired screen configuration from the
pull-down list of the composite screen list box, then click the
Delete button. Then, the selected screen configuration is deleted.
If you check the check box for Delete all registered form, then
click the Delete button, all screen configurations registered are
deleted.
<5> When you click the Indicate button, a screen image is displayed
on the personal computer according to the registered screen
configurations. At this time, Visual Basic is automatically
activated.
<6> Open the project explorer window of Visual Basic, then select and
double-click a composite screen form. The objects of the form are
displayed. This display represents the composite display of the
entire screen.

In the example above, MANOPRTN (MANOPRTN000.frm) is selected


and displayed.

- 42 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

4.3.9.2

Method of Composite Screen Output


The method of printing out a composite screen with Visual Basic
(abbreviated as VB) and Paint is indicated below.

CAUTION
To collect bitmaps from a machine operator's panel
screen in Simplified Chinese, use the
Ethernet-connected CNC screen display function.
<1> Choose [Project(P)] then <FPWin Property(E)> of VB. The
following dialog box appears:

Select a desired screen from the [Start-up Setting] list box, then
click the OK button.
<2> Choose [Run(D)] then <Start(S)> of VB. After a while, the whole
of the selected screen appears. Adjust the right-hand and lower
window frames.

<3> Press the ALT + Print Screen buttons on the keyboard to copy the
active window only to the clipboard.
<4> Activate Paint available with the Windows OS.

- 43 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

NOTE
When using Paint for a WORD document, for
example, open the WORD document at this time for
incorporation into the document with
[Edit(E)]-<Paint(P)>.

4.3.10

<5> Choose [Edit(E)]-<Paint(P)> of Paint.


<6> Choose [File(F)]-<Print(P)> of Paint, then click OK in the dialog
box to print out screen data.

Assistant V-UP

FPAssist for Excel95 V2.11 or earlier can be upgraded to FPAssist for


Excel2000. However, the Ver. UP button provided with FPAssist for
Excel95 V2.11 or earlier cannot be used because it causes an error.
Therefore, use [Assistant V-UP] for the upgrade. Before performing
this operation, use [Open Project] to select the project to be edited.
This upgrade operation can be used to restore degraded FPAssist in
addition to upgrading normal FPAssist.

CAUTION
When using both Excel95 and Excel2000 for
development, be sure to use Assistant V-UP in
these menu buttons to perform the upgrade and
restoration of FPAssist, regardless of the version of
FPAssist.
The upgrading up process checks and displays the version of FPAssist
in the selected project and the version of FPAssist that has been
installed. Then follow dialog messages that appear to continue the
upgrade.

- 44 -

4.USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05

CAUTION
When you have upgraded the FANUC PICTURE &
FPAssist package software, you may need to
upgrade the FPAssist tool or multi-language batch
input tool as well.
For information about upgrading of the
multi-language batch input tool, see Section 8.8.

- 45 -

5.DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE CNC

B-66254EN/05

DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE


CNC
The following files copied onto a memory card are downloaded to the
CNC and written to the FROM in the CNC by following the steps
explained below:
1
FP driver (INTFPCEX.MEM)
2
Operator's panel screen data (CEX0FPDT.MEM)
3
Machine flow diagnostic data (CEX1MCAL.MEM)
4
NC flow diagnostic data (CEX2NCAL.MEM)
<1> Method using the batch save/restoration function
The method is summarized below. For details, refer to the
maintenance manual of CNC used.

Insert the memory card into the card slot of the main control
unit.

Set the rotary switch to B.

Turn on the power to the control unit.

Check that the seven-segment indicator blinks "b".

Press the switch once to stop the blinking of "b".

Press the switch once again to change the display of the


seven-segment indicator to rotation display.

After a while, download operation is completed, and the


seven-segment indicator changes as follows:
[0]: Completion of downloading of data including S-RAM
backup data
Blinking of [3]:
Completion of downloading of data not including
S-RAM backup data

NOTE
This state occurs when operator's panel screen data
only or the FP driver data only is downloaded.
The following table describes F-ROM write errors.
LED indication
1 (blinking)

2 (blinking)
4 (blinking)

Error
Installation failure
(F-ROM fault)
No memory card inserted.
Memory card fault
The F-ROM area
insufficient.

Action

Replace the F-ROM.


Confirm the memory card is inserted and try again.
Use another memory card.
Relocate files in the F-ROM with the BOOT operation.
See "Actions when the F-ROM area is insufficient" below.

Turn off the power.


Extract the memory card.
Reset the rotary switch to 0.
Turn on the power again to start up the control unit with the
new screen data.
- 46 -

5.DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE CNC

B-66254EN/05

<2> Method based on boot processing


Turn on the power while pressing the upper-left corner of the
touch panel. The boot processing screen appears. Insert the
memory card holding operator's panel screen data into the memory
card slot located on the left side of the operator's touch panel.
Then, write the data files related to the operator's panel into the
F-ROM by using the SYSTEM DATA LOADING menu.

Actions when the F-ROM area is insufficient


When screen data is written into (downloaded to) the F-ROM, write
operation may fail because the F-ROM area is insufficient. In this
case, write operation may be enabled by using either or both of the two
procedures below. If the area becomes insufficient even when the
procedures are performed, consider a method of reducing the size of
operator's panel screen by, for example, reducing the size of image data
specified for flow diagnostic data.
[1] When the contiguous area is insufficient due to the fragmentation
of the F-ROM, the following procedure can be used to eliminate
the fragmentation.
*
The operations below must be done on the BOOT screen.
<1> Save all user files in the F-ROM onto the memory card.
<2> Delete all user files in the F-ROM.
<3> Write all user files saved onto the memory card back to
the F-ROM.
Content
PMC ladder
PSL ladder

Operator's
panel screen
software
(FANUC
PICTURE)

Types of user files


F-ROM file name
Description
PMC-SB
User ladder
PSLLAD(Series 18i-LNB)
PSL ladder

CEX 2.0M

FP control program

CEX0FPDT
CEX1MCAL
CEX2NCAL

FP screen data
Machine flow diagnostic data
CNC flow diagnostic data

CEX3CTMN(Series 18i-LNB)

Cycle monitor diagram collected data

CEX7REFE(Series 18i-LNB)

Cycle monitor reference diagram data

[2] The minimization function described in Section 6.7 can be used to


reduce the size of the FP screen data (CEX0FPDT.MEM). For
details, see Section 6.7.

- 47 -

6.OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION


SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

- 48 -

B-66254EN/05

6.1

6.OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

OVERVIEW OF FPAssist
FPAssist is the screen creation support tool for facilitating the creation
of standard screens for Toyota Motor. Standard screens for Toyota
Motor can be created simply by entering character strings and colors to
be used for buttons and lamps and related signal addresses in the
FPAssist work sheets.
The FPAssist work book consists of a whole setting work sheet and a
work sheet for each screen. When FPAssist is activated for the first
time, only the whole setting work sheet is displayed. By registering
operator's panel screens in the whole setting work sheet, a work sheet is
created and displayed for each screen.
The whole setting work sheet is a work sheet used not to set
screen-specific information but to set information common to the
operator's panel. The whole setting work sheet has operation buttons for
registering screens with menu buttons, deleting registered screens, and
changing screen assignment to menu buttons, and a conversion button
for creating screen data from data set in a work sheet. The method of
using each button provided on the whole setting work sheet is described
below.

Whole setting work sheet

- 49 -

6.OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

6.2

B-66254EN/05

REGISTERING/CHANGING/DELETING OPERATOR'S
PANEL SCREENS
Operation buttons for assigning machine operator's panel screens to
menu buttons, deleting screens already assigned to menu buttons, and
changing screen assignment to menu buttons are available.

6.2.1

Create
This button is used to create a new screen and assign it to a menu
button. Select a free screen number (line) in [Setting of the entire
system (1/4) Screen registration], then click the Create button. The
following dialog box appears:

Screen No indicates a selected screen number. Enter a desired screen


name in Screen, and select a function from the combo box of Function,
then click OK. A work sheet is created under the specified screen name,
and the new screen is set in the screen list of [Setting of the entire
system (1/4) Screen registration]. In Screen, enter a screen name
consisting of an alphanumeric character string not longer than 8
half-size characters. In Comment, enter a comment as required. An
entered comment is displayed in the Screen comment column.
If User screen creation is selected in Function, create, in the UserFrm
subfolder, a subscreen with the same name as specified in Screen, by
using FANUC PICTURE.
Function includes functions dedicated to the Series 18i-LNB.
To register a screen for the Series 18i-LNB, enable the model B
expansion function in the whole setting work sheet.

- 50 -

6.OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

6.2.2

Move
This button is used to change the screen number (= menu button
assignment location) of a screen already created. In the screen list of the
[Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet, select
(click) the screen name of a screen whose number is to be changed.
Then, click the Move button. The following dialog box appears:

Select a move destination screen number from the combo box, or enter
a move destination screen number on the keyboard, then click the OK
button.

6.2.3

Del
This button is used to delete a screen already created. In the screen list
of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet,
select (click) the screen name of a screen to be deleted. Then, click the
Del button. The following dialog box appears:

Check the screen number and screen name displayed in the dialog box,
then click the OK button. The confirmation dialog box shown below
appears. Then, click the OK button. The selected screen is deleted from
the screen list, and the work sheet for that screen is deleted.

- 51 -

6.OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

6.2.4

B-66254EN/05

Copy
This button is used to create a new screen by copying an existing screen.
In the screen list of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen
registration] sheet, select (click) the screen name of a copy source
screen. Then click the Copy button. The dialog box shown below
appears.

Enter desired data in Screen No and Screen name of the copy


destination, then click the OK button. The new screen is added to the
screen list, and a work sheet with the set screen name is created. The
new work sheet has the same data as set for the copy source.

6.2.5

Rename
This button is used to rename an existing screen. In the screen list of the
[Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet, select
(click) the screen name of a screen to be renamed. Then, click the
Rename button. The following dialog box appears:

Enter a new screen name in New screen name, then click the OK button.
The screen name displayed in the screen list and the name of the work
sheet are changed to the specified new screen name.
- 52 -

B-66254EN/05

6.3

6.OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

CHECKING SCREEN DATA


Each work sheet of FPAssist has a Check button for each setting table.
The Check button enables you to check if data set is correct. The
Check all button of the whole setting work sheet enables you to check
all screen data by a single operation without clicking the Check button
of each work sheet. (The function for checking all screens is available
only with E3.00 and later.)

6.4

CONVERTING DATA
To create screen data from a work sheet of FPAssist, click the Convert
button of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration]
sheet. Set necessary data in all work sheets and complete the checking
of all pages, then click the Convert button. Those property values such
as names, colors, and PMC addresses that are set in the work sheets are
written into a screen template created using FANUC PICTURE to
create screen data.
With FPAssist created for Excel2000, clicking the Convert button
displays the following conversion function selection dialog box:

To create screen data for the first time from the worksheet of FPAssist,
select "all the screen data". If only a part of the screen data of the
worksheet is converted in subsequent screen data creation, screen data
conversion can be speeded up by selecting "modified screen data only".
Even in this case, "all the screen data" may be selected to create screen
data.

- 53 -

6.OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

6.5

B-66254EN/05

VERSION DISPLAY
Click the Version button of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4)
Screen registration] sheet to display the version information of FPAssist.
With Excel2000 Version 6.01 and later, the FPAssist form converted
version for the multi-language display function is displayed as well.
(Note that the version of FPAssist differs from the version of the batch
input tool.) When making an inquiry about this software, obtain the
version number displayed by clicking the Version button.

6.6

UPGRADING TO THE LATEST VERSION


Click the Ver. up button of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4)
Screen registration] sheet to transport the screen data set in FPAssist
currently opened to data of FPAssist of the version installed on the
personal computer. This function is used to upgrade data created with
FPAssist of an old version to data of FPAssist of the latest version.
This function is also used to restore a minimized FPAssist sheet.

6.7

MINIMIZATION
Click the Minimize button of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4)
Screen registration] sheet to reduce a FPAssist work sheet to a
minimum size. A minimized FPAssist work sheet becomes a work
sheet consisting of setting data, so that the operations described in this
chapter are disabled for the work sheet. (All operation buttons except
the Ver. up button are eliminated.)
By minimizing FPAssist work sheets, the size of screen data occupying
the F-ROM of the CNC can be reduced. A minimized FPAssist work
sheet can be restored by upgrading to the latest version. This operation
restores a FPAssist work sheet to the original work sheet, and also
replaces FPAssist with FPAssist of the version currently installed on
the personal computer. (This function is available only with E3.00 and
later.)

- 54 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

SCREEN CREATION USING THE


SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL
(FPAssist)

- 55 -

B-66254EN/05

7.1

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE USING FPAssist


The flowchart below shows the procedure for creating an operator's
panel screen with FPAssist.
Activate FPAssist

Register necessary screens in


the screen registration table in
the whole setting work sheet

Set values in work sheet of


each screen

Check setting
data with Check
button

NG

OK

Data setting
completed for
all screens?
Yes
Create screen data from
work sheets with Convert
button

To MEM
creation

- 56 -

No

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.2

SCREEN REGISTRATION AND SETTING OF THE ENTIRE


SYSTEM

7.2.1

Edition Display Screen


Immediately after the power to the CNC system is turned on and the
system is activated, the operator's touch panel displays the edition
display screen (shown below). This screen displays the name and
creation date of operator's panel data, and the edition information of
the software products related to FANUC PICTURE. When the time
set in Edition screen timer (sec) (N8) of [Setting of the entire system
(2/4) Setting of global screen] (setting table 2/4) has elapsed after this
screen is displayed, the screen display automatically switches to the
screen set in Startup screen (G2) of setting table 2/4. If you click the
Hold Screen button while this screen is displayed, screen switching is
not performed, but the edition display screen continues to be displayed
until you click the Operator Panel button. When you click the
Operator Panel button in this state, the screen display switches to the
screen set in Startup screen (G2).
The Data Name/Edition field of this screen displays the data entered
in the Data name/edition field at the top of the [Setting of the entire
system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet (setting table 1/4). The system
sets the other display items.
(This function is available with E2.00 and later.)
The SETTING OP. TIME button is available with FPAssist Version
5.10 and later.

- 57 -

B-66254EN/05

7.2.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Operation Time Setting Screen


When the SETTING OP. TIME button displayed on the right side of
the edition display screen, the screen display switches to the operation
time setting screen shown below.
This screen enables the setting of operation time to be modified from
the operator's panel screen. This screen has the input items SETTING
HOLIDAYS and Fault accumulation method. By setting these items,
the definition of a time count target period of fault history data
displayed on the fault count screen and the method of accumulation
can be modified.

Display item
"Operation time selection."
SwitchTime button

SETTING OF TIME
SET.1, SET.2, SET.3

SETTING HOLIDAYS

"Fault accumulation
method" SwitchType button

Description
This button is used to switch the method of fault count accumulation between fault
stop time accumulation based on the operation time set using the FPAssist sheet
(referred to as an initial value) and fault count accumulation based on the operation
time set on this screen.
When, in "Operation time selection."
(1) "Initial value" is selected: The time set using the FPAssist sheet is displayed.
(2) "Screen setting" is selected: An operation time can be set on this setting screen.
The method of input and the meaning of an input value are the same as for the
item set in "Operation Time Setting - Setting Table (3/4)" of the FPAssist sheet.
Four holiday periods when the factory stops for a long time can set. Faults that occur
during the set periods are not subject to time accumulation. If 0 is specified as a start
month and day and end month and day, the specification of no holiday is assumed. If
a specified end month and day is earlier than a specified start month and day, the end
month and day is treated as the same date of the next year.
If a power failure involving faults occurs in a shift and extends to the next or
subsequent shifts, this button is used to determine in which shift the fault time of that
period is to be counted.
(1) Conventional: The fault time is counted as data for the shift when the power is
turned on. As the result, a time longer than the work hours of the
shift is counted.
(2) New type:
The fault time is equally distributed over the shifts during the
power failure.

- 58 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.2.3

Screen Switch Menu


Basically, one of the screen switch menus shown below is displayed at
the right edge of each operator's panel screen. Two types of screen
switch menus are available: a 4-button menu that has four screen
switch buttons, and a 5-button menu that has five screen switch
buttons. Up to four pages can be created for one of the two types of
menus. At the lowest part of a screen switch menu, a page switch
button is provided. The page switch button enables you to switch
between the screen switch menu pages. When you touch a screen
switch button on the screen switch menu, the screen assigned to the
button is displayed on the operator's panel.
BTN01

BTN01

BTN01

BTN02

BTN01

BTN02

BTN03

BTN02

BTN03

BTN04

BTN03

BTN04

BTN04

BTN05

BTN04

1/3

Screen switch button

Page switch button

3/3

2/3

BTN02
BTN03

1/3

5-button menu

4-button menu
Screen switch menu

- 59 -

B-66254EN/05

7.2.4

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Registering Screens
To assign a screen to a screen switch button, register the screen in the
[Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet (setting
table 1/4) of FPAssist. In the table of the [Setting of the entire system
(1/4) Screen registration] sheet, select (click) a screen switch button
(BTN01 to BTN05) with which the screen is to be registered. Then,
register the screen with the Create button. For the method of
registration, see Section 6.2(1), "Create". When a screen is registered,
the screen is assigned to a screen switch button on the screen switch
menu, and a work sheet for screen creation is created. If a screen is
registered in a spare line (line 21 to line 25) of setting table 1/4, a
work sheet is created for the screen, but the screen is assigned to no
screen switch button.
The figure below shows the correspondence between the [Setting of
the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet and the screen switch
menu. Whether to use the 5-button menu or 4-button menu is
determined by the setting of Switching mode (N1) of the setting table
(2/4). The 5-button menu can be used only when the Numerical Value
Switching button is not used on each operation screen and the
operation display screen.
The cycle time setting screen is called from the cycle time
measurement screen. So, the cycle time setting screen need not be
assigned to a screen switch button of the screen switch menu.
Accordingly, set the cycle time setting screen in a spare line (line 21
to line 25) of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen
registration] sheet.

Manual
Tool Ex g
Fault
Display

Tool cm p

NC
Operat

Cycle

1/3

Page1

Fault
NC
Screen
2/3

Page2

Guidance
FLOW
DIAG
OP
ST ATU S
Running
Stat us
3/3
Page3

- 60 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.2.5

Screen Registration - Setting Table (1/4)


This setting table consists of fields for setting the name, version, and
language of an operator's panel to be created, and columns for
registering screens to be created. For details, see the descriptions
below.

[Setting of the entire system(1/4) Screen registration]


0
4
530

System name:

G1_1

Data path:
Comment:

Enhanced function for MODEL-B 0:Disable 1:Enable

No Pg
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Create

Check all

Btn. name Screen name


BTN01
BTN02
BTN03
BTN04
BTN05
BTN01
BTN02
BTN03
BTN04
BTN05
BTN01
BTN02
BTN03
BTN04
BTN05
BTN01
BTN02
BTN03
BTN04
BTN05
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare

G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1

Move
S33
S40

Del

Rename

Convert

Version

S30

Ver. Up

Minimize

N4

N3

Language

Blinking
address
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2
A1_2

Mode

Screen comment

N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2

S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32
S32

Function

Name

K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1
K1

Copy
Data name/edition:
No. of menu pages:

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8

G1

G1_1
K1

S8

A1_1
A1_2
N1

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8

No. of
rows
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1

Screen selected
address
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1
A1_1

: Screen name consisting of a character string not longer than


8 alphanumeric characters. The name entered in Screen of
the New screen registration dialog box is set. If you select
NC screen as the screen function (K1), specify 70 as the
screen name. (At screen registration time, 70 is
automatically set.)
: A project name set at project creation time is displayed.
(This setting cannot be changed.)
: Screen function name. For both G1 and K1, make a selection
in the combo box of the New screen registration dialog box.
Do not directly enter data in this sheet. When calling an NC
screen, select NC Screen as the function name, and specify
the key code of the NC screen as the screen name. The
default is 70. Usually, use the default. (See the description of
the C language executor.)
: Character string (8 half-size characters (recommended), not
longer than 9 half-size characters) to be displayed on a
screen switch button. Up to three lines can be specified.
For a manual operation screen, a character string formed by
combining up to the second line is displayed as the screen
title at the upper-left corner of the screen.
: Set the address of a signal that is turned on when the desired
screen is selected.
: Address of a signal for blinking a screen switch button.
(Each signal is used by the system, and cannot be changed.)
: Number of lines of a character string displayed on a screen
switch button. (3 lines max.)
- 61 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

N2

: Set whether to use (1)/not use (0) the screen switch buttons.
(When no data is entered, the specification of 0 is assumed.)
N3
: Number of pages of screen switch buttons (menu)
S32,S40: A comment on the system and individual screens can be
entered.
S33
: The path to the folder where the template of a standard
screen is stored is indicated. When FANUC PICTURE is
installed, the template is copied into a specified installation
path together with FANUC PICTURE and FPAssist. Usually,
AUTO is displayed in this cell of the sheet. In this case,
however, the template in the installation path is
automatically used. So, usually, the data of this cell need not
be changed. Only when a template other than the installed
template needs to be used, specify the path to the folder
where the template is stored.
S30
: Enter the name of an operator's panel and the edition of data.
A character string entered here is displayed in the edition
display screen that appears on the touch panel screen when
the power is turned on. Enter a character string not longer
than 30 half-size characters. (This function is available with
E2.00 and later.)
N4
: By using a number from 0 to 2, specify a language used with
a screen to be created. (0: Japanese, 1: English, 2: Polish)
In accordance with this setting, the language of
screen-displayed characters not entered by the user but
output by FANUC PICTURE in a fixed manner is switched.
This setting can be changed at any time.
(This function is available with E3.00 and later.)
With E5.00 and later, if even the same output language
number is input, the default caption of FPAssist is set again
in the language corresponding to the number. If the FPAssist
sheet is upgraded to a new version, for example, this
operation
can
incorporate
the
default
caption
additions/changes made with the new version.
N5
: 0: When an operator's panel screen for the Series 18i-LNA
or PMi-LNA is created
1: When an operator's panel screen for the Series 18i-LNB
is created
(This function is available with FPAssist Version 5.10
and later.)

NOTE
When using FANUC PICTURE of E2.00 or earlier,
be sure to define the screens listed below. If a
screen is not used, assign the screen to a menu key
and set Mode = 0, or set the screen in a spare line.
- NC operation screen
- Tool exchange counter screen
- Fault count screen
- Cycle time measurement screen
- Cycle time setting screen

- 62 -

B-66254EN/05

7.2.5.1

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Default name button


The Default name button has been added to function setting sheets of
FPAssist Version 6.00 and later.
This button re-sets the characters (a language set as the output
language) always output by FANUC PICTURE for each function
setting sheet. To re-set the characters for all screens, set the output
language for whole setting.
Target cells are indicated in light gray. In light gray cells, a fixed
character string that can be changed is set.
When the version of a project has been upgraded, a default caption is
sometimes not set in a newly added target cell depending on the
combination of the old version and new version. In such a case, press
the Default name button.
This button is added to the following function setting sheets:

Function sheets to which the Default name button is added


Whole setting
NC operation screen
Operational situation screen
Load torque monitor screen
Safety IO status display screen

- 63 -

B-66254EN/05

7.2.6

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Automatic Screen Switching, Initial Screen Setting, etc. Setting Table (2/4)
By setting the names of screens and signal addresses for calling those
screens in the automatic screen switching setting area of setting table
2/4, screen display can be switched with a ladder program instruction
of the PMC.
In automatic screen switching setting table (1), usually, the names of
screens for automatic screen switching are already entered. So, set a
screen name and calling signal address for each screen. This table has
a priority order defined. The buzzer stop screen entered at the top of
the table has the highest priority, and lower entries have lower
priorities. If multiple calling signals are set to 1 simultaneously, the
calling signals are processed according to this priority order. The
operation of the operator's panel for each calling signal depends on
whether the automatic mode or manual mode is set as described below.
The description below, however, does not apply to the buzzer stop
screen.

When the automatic mode is set


When a calling signal is set to 1, the screen display switches to
the screen corresponding to the signal. If multiple calling signals
are set to 1 simultaneously, the screen with the highest priority is
displayed. When the calling signal for the screen with the highest
priority is set to 0 in this state, the screen display switches to the
screen with the next priority.

When the manual mode is set


If the screen currently displayed is set in the automatic screen
switching setting table, and the calling signal for a screen with a
higher priority is set to 1, the screen switch button (menu)
corresponding to the signal blinks. If multiple calling signals are
set to 1 simultaneously, the screen switch button corresponding
to the screen with the highest priority blinks. When the calling
signal for the screen with the highest priority is set to 0 in this
state, the screen switch button corresponding to the calling signal
for the screen with the next priority blinks. The calling signal for
a screen with a priority lower than the priority of the screen
currently displayed is ignored.
If the screen currently displayed is not set in the automatic screen
switching setting table, the priority of the screen is assumed to be
the lowest.

Operation of the buzzer stop screen


The buzzer stop screen is called when the calling signal is set to
1, regardless of whether the automatic mode or manual mode is
set, and the subscreen shown below is displayed at the center
over the current screen. When the calling signal is set to 0, the
buzzer stop screen is erased, and the screen display returns to the
previous state. If you press the buzzer stop button on the buzzer
stop screen when the buzzer stop screen is displayed, the buzzer
OFF signal is output. This signal continues to be 1 until the
calling signal for the buzzer stop screen is set to 0. While the
buzzer stop screen is displayed, operations other than the
pressing of the buzzer stop button, such as a screen switch
- 64 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

operation, are rejected. So, a ladder must be created to ensure


that the buzzer stop screen is erased when the buzzer stop button
is pressed. Usually, create a PMC ladder so that the calling signal
for the buzzer stop screen is set to 1 on the rising edge of an
event that causes the buzzer to sound, and is set to 0 when the
buzzer OFF signal is output.

Operation of the caution message screen


If the actuator button is pressed in a mode other than the manual
mode (when manual selection signal = 0), button operation is
blocked, and the caution message screen pops up at the center of
the screen. This screen disappears when the OK button is pressed.
Alternatively, the caution message screen automatically
disappears when the time set in Caution screen delete time (sec)
of the setting table has elapsed.
A message to be displayed in this screen is to be set in Caution
message of the setting table. The default is shown below. The
display of the caution message screen can be disabled by setting
the caution message inhibit signal set at the bottom of the
[Pop-up screen settings] table to 1.

To call a user screen or a screen not listed in automatic screen


switching setting table (1) from a ladder program, use automatic
screen switching setting table (2). From the combo box, select
the name of a screen to be called. Next, set the address of the
calling signal. Then, by using the column of the order of priority
designated signals at the left end of automatic screen switching
setting table (2), set the priority of the screen in the priority order
set in automatic screen switching setting table (1). The priority of
the screen is set to follow the priority of the screen selected with
the combo box in the column of the order of priority designated
signals. Higher entries in automatic screen switching setting table
(2) have higher priorities. So, if the same screen name is set more
than once in the column of the order of priority designated
signals, the higher entries have higher priorities.
(The function of automatic screen switching setting table (2) is
available with E2.17 and later.)
- 65 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Automatic screen switching setting table (1)

The default caution message and default buzzer stop


message are as follows:
Caution message: Not in MANUAL mode.
Buzzer stop message: Touch this button to stop buzzer.

[Setting of the entire system(2/4) Setting of global screen]


-1

CHECK

OK
[Pop-up screen settings]
Auto screen switching
Screen name
Address
Buzzer stop part
A1_1
A1_1
High
Char. string
Manual selection
G1
Equipment fault P1
G1
A1_1
A1_1
Name label
S4
NC related fault
G1
G1
A1_1
Prev. value label
S6
Tool P1 stop
G1
A1_1
Key-in value label
S6
Tool P2 stop
G1
A1_1
Clear button label
S8
Tool P3 stop
A1_1
Key del button
S8
Tool P1 forecast
G1
A1_1
P
Input button
S8
Tool P2 forecast
G1
A1_1
R
Caution inhibit address
A1_8
Tool P3 forecast
G1
G1
A1_1
I
Tool P1 prec.forecast
G1
A1_1
O
Tool P2 prec.forecast
G1
A1_1
R
Char. string
Tool P3 prec.forecast
Compensation P1 limit
G1
A1_1
I
G1
A1_1
T
Caution message
S26
S26
S26
Compensation P2 limit
G1
A1_1
Y
Buzzer stop msg
S26
S26
S26
Compensation P3 limit
G1
A1_1
Compensation P4 limit
G1
A1_1
Compensation P5 limit
G1
A1_1
Compensation P6 limit
Automatic screen
MANOPG2
G1
A1_1
Startup screen
G2
1
Compensation P7 limit
setting table (2)
G1
A1_1
Compensation P8 limit
G1
A1_1
Compensation P9 limit
G1
A1_1
Compensation P10 limit
G1
A1_1
The order of priority designated signal screen na
Call
Compensation P11 limit
G1
A1_1
(The next order of the designated screen is take Screen name
address
Compensation P12 limit
G4
G1
A1_1
Tool address
FLTLIST
A1_11
Quality check P1
G3
G4
G1
A1_1
Spare screen
ALPHAI
A1_11
Quality check P2
G3
G4
G1
A1_1
Low
FIXMAINT
A1_11
Spare screen
G3
G4
A1_11
SAFETYIO
G3
G4
A1_2
CYCLEMON
A1_11
Buzzer OFF execution addr.
G3
G4
A1_3
TORQUE
A1_11
Manual selection addr.
G3
G4
A1_4
A1_11
Execution button addr.
G3
G4
A1_11
G3
G4
N1
A1_11
Switching mode(0:4-btn,1:5-btn)
G3
G4
N2
A1_11
Operation button automatic off time (sec)
G3
G4
N3
A1_11
Caution screen delete time (sec)
G3
A1_5
Back-light off inhibit addr.
N4
Back-light off time (min)
A1_6
"Acquired alarm code" signal address
A1_7
"Read alarm code" signal address
Alarm code (WORD size) address
A2
Alarm expiration time (sec)
N5
Alarm counter initialization signal
A1_9
A1_10
Cycle time counter initialization
N7
Initialization signal on time (sec)
N8
Edition screen timer (sec)

G1
A1_1

No. of
rows
N6
N6

switching

: Name of a screen to be called automatically


: Address of an automatic screen calling signal. To call a
screen such as a flow diagnostic screen automatically when a
CNC alarm is issued, set the automatic screen calling signal
set here to 1 by using the NC alarm (NCAL) signal output
on the M-NET interface.
A1_2 : Specify the address of the buzzer OFF signal output when
the buzzer stop screen is touched.
A1_3, 4: Address where the manual selection signal and execution
button signal are input
A1_5 : Address of the back-light off inhibit signal. While this signal
is on, the back-light is not turned off.
A1_6 : Address of the "acquired alarm code" signal output when the
operator's panel receives an alarm code for the guidance
screen
A1_7 : Address of the "read alarm code" signal output from the PLC
after an alarm code for the guidance screen is set
- 66 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

A1_8

: Address of the signal for disabling the display of the caution


message screen
A1_9, A1_10 : Specify the addresses of signals for initializing the
values (including the past measured values) of the
alarm counter and cycle time counter.
A2
: Address for setting an alarm code (16-bit binary code) for
the guidance screen
N1
: Set whether to use a 4-button menu or 5-button menu. 0:
4-button menu, 1: 5-button menu
N2
: Set a time required until the operation button (actuator
button) selection state is released. If 0 is set, automatic
release is disabled. This setting is applicable to all screens.
(0 to 9999 seconds)
N3
: Set a time required until the caution window displayed when
the actuator button is pressed in a mode other than the
manual mode is automatically erased. (0 to 99 seconds)
N4
: Set a time in minutes from the last touch operation until the
back-light is turned off. (0 to 255 minutes)
N5
: If an alarm code is not input when the time set here has
elapsed, the operator's panel assumes that the alarm is
released. For details, see the descriptions of the
troubleshooting guidance screen and flow diagnostic screen.
N6
: Number of lines of character strings displayed in the caution
message screen and buzzer stop screen. (3 lines max.)
N7
: Set a time width used to regard the signals input in A1_9 and
A1_10 as valid. A signal with a width shorter than the time
width set here is not assumed to be an initialization signal. (0
to 99 seconds)
N8
: When the power is turned on, the edition display screen of
FANUC PICTURE is displayed on the touch panel for the
time set here. When the time set here has elapsed, the screen
display automatically switches to the initial screen set in
G1_1. If you touch the Hold Screen button on the screen
while the edition display screen is displayed, the edition
display screen continues to be displayed until you touch the
Operator Panel button, regardless of the value set in this item.
(0 to 999 seconds)
G2
: From the combo box, select the name of an operator's panel
screen to be displayed first after the edition display screen.
S4, S6, S8 : Set character strings to be displayed in the ten-key pad
for numeric value setting. As the defaults, the character
strings indicated to the right of the table are set.
The setting is unchangeable with FPAssist Version 5.10
and later.
S26
: Set character strings to be displayed on the caution message
screen and buzzer stop screen. When the default character
strings are satisfactory, no modification is needed.
G3
: Set the priority of a screen to be called. The priority after a
screen selected from the combo box is set.
G4
: From the combo box, select a screen name to be called from
the ladder program.
A1_11 : Address of a calling signal
- 67 -

B-66254EN/05

7.2.7

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Shift Time Setting - Setting Table (3/4)

[Setting of entire system(3/4) Shift information settings]


-1CHECK

OK
Set 1
Set 2
N1
N1
Setting Valid/Invalid
Shift start time(H)
N2
N2
Shift start time(M)
N3
N3
N4
Shift start day of the week
Shift end time(H)
N2
N2
N3
N3
Shift end time(M)
N4
Shift end day of the week
The number of break time
N5
N2
N2
1st.break start time(H)
1st.break start time(M)
N3
N3
1st.break end time(H)
N2
N2
N3
N3
1st.break end time(M)
2nd.break start time(H)
N2
N2
N3
N3
2nd.break start time(M)
2nd.break end time(H)
N2
N2
2nd.break end time(M)
N3
N3
N2
N2
3rd.break start time(H)
3rd.break start time(M)
N3
N3
N2
N2
3rd.break end time(H)
3rd.break end time(M)
N3
N3
In shift signal address
In break signal address

Set 3
N1
N2
N3
N2
N3
N2
N3
N2
N3
N2
N3
N2
N3
N2
N3
N2
N3

Common

Shift
1
1 shift TODAY
2-3 shif CURRENT

title
2
BEFORE
PREV.

3
1 WEEK
5 SHIFTS

Common
Common

In this table, set character strings to be displayed


on the fault count screen and operational
situation screen. When the default character
strings are satisfactory, no modification is
needed.

A1_1
A1_2

N1

: Indicates whether Set1, Set2 and Set3 are valid or invalid.


Valid = 1, Invalid = 0
Set3 is set when a three-shift work system is employed. The
table below indicates the three valid combinations of Set1,
Set2, and Set3. Do not set any other combinations.
When three-shift work is set on the operation time setting
screen of the operator's panel, specify operation time
accumulation per shift for two or more shifts.
(The Set3 function is available with FPAssist Version 5.10
and later.)
Set1
1
1
1

N2
N3
N4

0
Sunday

A1_1
A1_2

Set2
0
1
1

Set3
0
0
1

Operation time accumulation unit


Accumulation per day
Accumulation per shift for two shifts per day
Accumulation per shift for three shifts per day

: Set hour data for a shift start time, shift end time, break start
time, and break end time with the 24-hour system.
: Set minute data for a shift start time, shift end time, break
start time, and break end time.
: Set a shift start day of the week and shift end day of the
week.
1
Monday

2
Tuesday

3
Wednesday

4
Thursday

5
Friday

: The in-shift signal is output to an address set here.


: The in-break signal is output to an address set here.

- 68 -

6
Saturday

B-66254EN/05

7.2.8

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Output of Internal Operator's Panel Data - Setting Table (4/4)


With FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist E2.14 and later, the data
managed within the operator's panel and listed below can be
transferred to the D area of the PMC. Data transferred to the PMC
with this function can be further transferred to the host computer with
a function such as the FL-net function and FOCAS1 function. Thus,
the host computer can taken in data displayed on the operator's panel.
For the layout of data transferred to the D area of the PMC and the
method of data transmission control for using the FL-net function, see
Appendix D, "METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S
PANEL DATA".
Screen name
Tool change
counter
Cycle time
measurement
Fault number list

Operational
situation

Type of data
Stop counter value
Current counter value
Standard total cycle time
Total cycle time(10 times)
Fault number of times(today)
Equipment fault number(Today)
Equipment fault acc. Time(Today)
Tool change number(Today)
Tool change acc. Time(Today)
Quality check number(Today)
Quality check acc. Time(Today)
Continuous off number(Today)
Continuous off acc. Time(Today)
Parts full number(Today)
Parts full acc. Time(Today)
No part number(Today)
No part acc. Time(Today)
Cycle time (Today)
Machined part(Today)
Operation rate(Today)
OK part rate(Today)

Amount of data
4 Byte x 48
4 Byte x 48
2 Byte
2 Byte x 10
2 Byte x 284
2 Byte
4 Byte
2 Byte
4 Byte
2 Byte
4 Byte
2 Byte
4 Byte
2 Byte
4 Byte
2 Byte
4 Byte
2 Byte
4 Byte
4 Byte
4 Byte

Setting table (4/4)

N1: Set whether to use the function for transferring operator's panel
data to the PMC. (0: Not use, 1: Use)

- 69 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

A1: Specify an operator's panel data transfer destination PMC address.


Only an address in the D area can be specified. Usually, 1,024
bytes from the end of the D area are used. In this case, specify
6976.
A specifiable address is a multiple of 4. If an address other than a
multiple of 4 is specified, the specified address is rounded to the
multiple of 4 that is closest to and smaller than the specified
value.
N2: Set 1 when operator's panel data transferred to the D area is to be
transferred to the host computer with the FL-net function. Set 0
when the FL-net function is not used, for example, when
operator's panel data is transferred to the host computer with the
FOCAS1 function or is processed by a PMC ladder. (0: Not use
FL-net, 1: Use FL-net)
A2: When data is transferred between the PMC and host computer
with the FL-net function, a communication interface area needs
to be allocated in the R area of the PMC. In this item, set the
address of a transmission interface area used for the message
transmission server function with confirmation. The 20 bytes
starting at the address set here is used as the interface area. In this
item, set only a numeric value with address word R omitted.
A3: In this item, set the address of a receive interface area used for
the message transmission server function with confirmation of
FL-net. The 12 bytes starting at the address set here is allocated
as the interface area in the R area. In this item, set only a numeric
value with address word R omitted.

- 70 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.3

FAULT DISPLAY SCREEN


The fault display screen consists of 63 lamps (LMP01-63) and 7
manual buttons (BTN01-07) arranged as shown below. The fault
display screen is used to display fault states with lamps.
LMP01

LMP02

LMP03

LMP04

LMP05

LMP06

LMP07

LMP08

LMP09

LMP10

LMP11

LMP12

LMP13

LMP14

LMP15

LMP16

LMP17

LMP18

LMP19

LMP20

LMP21

LMP22

LMP23

LMP24

LMP25

LMP26

LMP27

LMP28

LMP29

LMP30

LMP31

LMP32

LMP33

LMP34

LMP35

LMP36

LMP37

LMP38

LMP39

LMP40

LMP41

LMP42

LMP43

LMP44

LMP45

LMP46

LMP47

LMP48

LMP49

LMP50

LMP51

LMP52

LMP53

LMP54

LMP55

LMP56

LMP57

LMP58

LMP59

LMP60

LMP61

LMP62

LMP63

BTN01

BTN02

BTN03

BTN04

BTN05

BTN06

BTN07

- 71 -

Manual
Operatio
Fault
Display
Tool
Exchang
NC
Operation

1/3

B-66254EN/05

7.3.1

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Components
The specifications of the lamps and manual buttons that make up the
screen are described below.

7.3.1.1

LMP01 to LMP63: Lamps


These lamps provide the following indications according to the values
of PMC addresses:

When a lamp is off


Chamfered rectangle with the frame in lamp ON color and the
inside in lamp OFF color.
The character string is displayed in the color corresponding to the
lamp OFF color.
When a lamp is on
Chamfered rectangle with the lamp ON color.
The character string is displayed in the color corresponding to the
lamp ON color.

CAUTION
The lamps have no input for blinking.

7.3.1.2

BTN01 to BTN07: Manual buttons


The manual buttons operate in one of five modes: operation mode 2 to
operation mode 6. Operation mode 1 cannot be used.

<1> Operation mode 2: Momentary button


A button is on while it is held down. A button is off when it is
released.
Depending on the ON or OFF state of a button, ON (1) or OFF (0) is
output to the output address.
Each button is displayed as follows:
Button state

OFF

ON

Frame color
Display lamp color
Character color

Frame OFF color


Lamp OFF color
Character OFF color

Frame ON color
Lamp ON color
Character ON color

- 72 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

<2> Operation mode 3: Momentary button with a lamp


A lamp is on while it is held down. A lamp is off when it is released.
Depending on the ON or OFF state of a button, ON (1) or OFF (0) is
output to the output address.
Depending on the state of a button, the display operation of the button
varies as indicated below.
Button state
Lamp turn-on
address
Frame color
Display lamp color
Character color
Blink operation

OFF
OFF

ON
ON

Frame OFF color


Lamp OFF
Lamp ON
color
color
Character
Character
OFF color
ON color
Enabled

OFF

ON

Frame ON color
Lamp ON
Lamp OFF
color
color
Character
Character
ON color
OFF color
Disabled

If the value of a lamp blink address is ON when blink operation is


enabled, ON display and OFF display are alternately repeated. (This
operation is not performed when the value of the lamp turn-on address
is ON.)

<3> Operation mode 4: Actuator button


Each time a button is pressed, the button switches between the ON
and OFF states. When a button is set to ON if a group number other
than 0 is set, the other buttons of the same group number are set to
OFF. Up to nine groups (1 to 9) can be set in one screen.
Depending on the ON or OFF state of a button, ON (1) or OFF (0) is
output to the output address.
Depending on the state of a button, the display operation of the button
varies as indicated below.
Button state
Lamp turn-on
address
Frame color
Display lamp
color
Character color
Blink operation

OFF
OFF

ON
ON

Frame OFF color


Lamp OFF
Lamp ON
color
color
Character
Character
OFF color
ON color
Enabled

OFF

ON

Frame ON color
Lamp OFF
Lamp ON
color
color
Character
Character
OFF color
ON color
Enabled

If the value of a lamp blink address is ON when blink operation is


enabled, ON display and OFF display are alternately repeated. (This
operation is not performed when the value of the lamp turn-on address
is ON.)
In this mode, a button is inoperative when the value of the manual
selection address is OFF. The state of a button does not change when
the value of the execution button address is ON. In addition, when the
screen display switches to another screen, the button output addresses
are set to OFF.

- 73 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

<4> Operation mode 5: Alternate button A


Each time a button is pressed, the button switches between the ON
and OFF states. When a button is set to ON if a group number other
than 0 is set, the other buttons of the same group number are set to
OFF. Up to nine groups (1 to 9) can be set in one screen.
Depending on the ON or OFF state of a button, ON (1) or OFF (0) is
output to the output address. When the screen display switches to
another screen, the buttons are set to OFF, and the output addresses
are set to OFF.
Except for the above, alternate button A operates in the same way as
the momentary button with a lamp.
Button state
Lamp turn-on
address
Frame color
Display lamp
color
Character color
Blink operation

OFF
OFF

ON
ON

Frame OFF Frame ON


color
color
Lamp OFF
Lamp ON
color
color
Character
Character
OFF color
ON color
Enabled

OFF

ON

Frame ON Frame OFF


color
color
Lamp ON
Lamp OFF
color
color
Character
Character
ON color
OFF color
Disabled

<5> Operation mode 6: Alternate button B


Alternate button B operates in the same way as alternate button A
except that even when the screen display switches to another screen,
the buttons and output addresses preserve the original states.

NOTE
The manual buttons do not operate in the lamp
mode (operation mode 1).

- 74 -

B-66254EN/05

7.3.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Lamp Setting - Setting Table (1/2)

S8 : Set a character string to be displayed on each fault display lamp.


(8 half-size characters (recommended), 9 half-size characters
max.)
N1 : Number of lines of a character string above (2 lines max.)
B1 : Set a type of character. (Half/full size: 1, Double height and
width size: 2, 6x size: 3)
C1 : Specify the ON and OFF colors of each lamp.
Symbol
Lamp color
Character color

W
White
Black

R
Red
White

G
Green
Black

B
Blue
White

O
Orange
Black

Y
Yellow
Black

WB
Light blue
Black

BL
Black
White

GL
Gray
Black

When a lamp is set to OFF, the ON color frame is displayed.


A1 : Set the address of a signal for turning on each lamp.

- 75 -

B-66254EN/05

7.3.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Button Area Setting - Setting Table (2/2)

S8: Set a character string to be displayed on each button. (8 half-size


characters (recommended), 9 half-size characters max.)
N1: Number of lines of a character string above (4 lines max.)
B1: Set a type of character. (Half/full size: 1, Double height and
width size: 2, 6x size: 3)
C1: Specify the ON and OFF colors of the display lamp and frame of
each button.
N2: Select a type of button from the following:
2: Momentary button
3: Momentary button with a lamp
4: Actuator button
5: Alternate button A
6: Alternate button B
N3: When the actuator button or alternate button A/B is selected, set
a group. (In one group, only one actuator button or alternate
button can be selected.) Up to nine groups can be set in one
screen (N3 = 1 to 9). When 0 is set, the selector switch function
is disabled, and each button operates as a single alternate button.
N4: Set whether to use each button. (Use = 1, Not use = 0)
A1: Set the address of a signal for turning on/off each lamp and the
address of the output signal of each button.

- 76 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.4

MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN (COMMON


SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAGE 1 AND PAGE 2)

7.4.1

Screen Configuration
The manual operation screen consists of a lamp area, manual button
area, and numeric display area. The lamp area has 24 lamps (LMP01
to LMP24), and the manual button area has 28 manual button (BTN01
to BTN28). Each of the lamp area and manual button area can be
switched between two screens. Page 1 of the numeric display area can
display up to four items of numeric data such as a tool number and
cycle time, and up to two pages can be displayed by setting. The
numeric display area can also display a signal monitor area used to
monitor the states of I/O signals. You can switch between the pages of
each area by using the three page switch buttons (lamp switch button,
button switch button, and number switch button).
LMP01
LMP08

LMP02
LMP09

LMP03
LMP10

LMP04
LMP11

LMP05
LMP12

LMP06

LMP07

LMP13

LMP14
NUM01
NUM02
NUM03
NUM04

Lamp
Page
Button
Page
Number

LMP15

LMP16

LMP17

LMP18

LMP19

LMP20

LMP21

LMP22

LMP23

LMP24

KOGU1
KOGU2
KOGU3
KOGU4

BTN01

BTN02

BTN03

BTN04

BTN05

BTN06

BTN07

Fault
Display

BTN08

BTN09

BTN10

BTN11

BTN12

BTN13

BTN14

Tool
Exchang

BTN15

BTN16

BTN17

BTN18

BTN19

BTN20

BTN21

NC
Operatio

BTN22

BTN23

BTN24

BTN25

BTN26

BTN27

BTN28

1/3

Page
Manual
Operation

The two subscreens displayed in the numeric display area are detailed
below.

- 77 -

B-66254EN/05

7.4.1.1

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Numeric display subscreen


The numeric display subscreen can display four types of numeric data
and their names. The upper three lines can display arbitrary numeric
data held in the PMC. PMC data to be displayed can be set in the
left-hand table of [Manual operation screen (3/3) Parameter setting for
numeric display]. The bottom line can display an arbitrary item of data
displayed on the cycle time measurement screen. A desired item of
data can be set in the left-hand table of [Manual operation screen (3/3)
Parameter setting for numeric display]. Up to two pages of numeric
display can be set for display. In this case, the number switch button
can be used to switch between the pages.
Name

Numeric
value

Name

Numeric
value

Name

Numeric
value

Name

7.4.1.2

Cycle time value

Signal monitor subscreen


The signal monitor subscreen can display the states (8 bits) of up to
four arbitrary PMC addresses at the same time. By touching the
alphabet setting field and numeric setting field of the address setting
section, the alphabet input keys and numeric input keys pop up,
respectively. With these keys, enter a PMC address to be displayed.
When a PMC address is set, the state (one byte) of the set address is
displayed by 0s and 1s.

Alphabet setting
field

- 78 -

0123

01001001

0081

00000000

0100

00110010

0200

11100000

Numeric
setting field

State display
field

B-66254EN/05

7.4.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Lamp and Manual Button Setting - Setting Tables (1/3, 2/3)


Each of the lamp area setting table and manual button area setting
table has setting lines for two pages. Whether to use page 2 can be
specified using the column of Use 2nd page on the right side of page
3/3.

The method of lamp and button setting is the same as for the fault
display screen.
Up to four lines can be used to specify a button name on the manual
operation screen.

- 79 -

B-66254EN/05

7.4.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (3/3)


In the table below, set the addresses of data and item names to be
displayed in the numeric display area. The table has setting lines for
two pages. Whether to use page 2 of the numeric display area can be
specified using the NUM_SEL line in the right-hand table. In the
column of Button name in the right-hand table, set a character string
to be displayed on the page switch button.

A2

: Set the address (2 bytes) of a numeric value to be


displayed.
N1
: Set the number of decimal places of each numeric value.
A number from 0 to 3 can be specified. When 0 is
specified, the decimal point is not displayed. Set 1 at all
times for cycle time display (KOGU4 of items 4 and 8).
S14, S8_1 : Character string for describing each numeric value
N2
: Set whether to use numeric display. (Use=1, Not use=0)
N4
: By using an item number of the cycle time measurement
screen, specify cycle time data to be displayed in
KOGU4. If 1 is specified here, for example, the latest
cycle time in the item of Motion1 on the cycle time
measurement screen is displayed. A cycle time value is
displayed in 1/10 seconds. So, for this item, set 1 as the
number of decimal places.
When a cycle time monitor screen is created, Motion1
only is available. So, set 1 here.
N3_1
: Set whether to use page 2 of the lamp display area. (Use
= 1, Not use = 0)
N3_2
: Set whether to use page 2 of the manual button area. (Use
= 1, Not use = 0)
N3_3
: Set whether to use page 2 of the numeric display area.
(Use = 1, Not use = 0)
S8_2
: Character string to be displayed on a page switch button
N5
: Set whether to use signal monitor display. (Use = 1, Not
use = 0)

- 80 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.5

NC OPERATION SCREEN

7.5.1

Screen Configuration
The NC operation screen is used to operate the CNC. The NC
operation screen consists of a lamp area (LMP01 to LMP12) for
displaying NC states, a button area (BTN01 to BTN28) for operating
the NC, and a sub-window where the alarm display subscreen, axis
coordinate display subscreen, or program check subscreen can be
displayed by switching.
With FPAssist Version 5.30 and later, a new function has been added
to allow the indications of a lamp area from LMP05 to LMP08 and a
button area from BTN12 to BTN15 to be changed using the SELECT
AXIS button displayed in the upper part of the menu button area. With
this function, lamps near the reference position for up to eight axes
and axis selection buttons for handle and jog operations can be
provided.
LMP01

LMP02

LMP03

LMP04

NEAR REFERENCE POSITION


LMP06

LMP07

LMP08

LMP09

LMP10

LMP11

LMP12

MODE

BTN04

BTN02
BTN05

BTN06

SELECT
AXIS

MSG02

SCAILNG

BTN03

Position

POS

MSG01

LMP05

BTN01

AXIS

BTN07
BTN08

BTN10

BTN13

BTN16

BTN17

BTN14

BTN15

BTN18

BTN19

BTN11
BTN20

NC
Operation

BTN21

BTN22

BTN23

BTN24

BTN25

BTN26

TOOL
Counter

BTN27

BTN28

2/3

BTN09

HANDLE/JOG
BTN12

Manual
Slide

ATC
Operation

For display in the sub-window in the upper-right area of the screen


above, you can select one of the three subscreens below.

- 81 -

B-66254EN/05

7.5.1.1

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Alarm display subscreen


If a CNC alarm is issued, the Alarm/Error code field displays an alarm
number, and the ALARM/FAULT MESSAGE field displays an alarm
message set in the table of the [NC operation screen (4/4) Parameter
settings for fault messages] page. An alarm number is read from a
PMC address set in the Alarm code top address parameter of the [NC
operation screen (3/4) Parameter settings for axis state display] page.
If an alarm (No. 0300 to No. 0519) related to a controlled axis is
issued, an axis name is also displayed after the alarm number. An axis
name set in the Path/Axis No./Name correspondence table of the [NC
operation screen (3/4) Parameter settings for axis state display] page is
displayed. This screen is always displayed.
NC fault.

NC type

ALARM/FAULT

FANUC 18i

Alarm/Error code

MESSAGE
ALARM/Error message

7.5.1.2

Axis coordinate display subscreen


The coordinate value and tolerance situation of a selected axis are
displayed. A type of axis is selected from the table below according to
the signals (2 bits) at an address set in the Axis select address
parameter of the [NC operation screen (3/4) Parameter settings for
axis state display] page. A character string to be displayed in the
Name field is to be set in the Axis No./Name correspondence table of
the same page. An axis coordinate value is read from a PMC address
set in the Axis position address parameter.
In the fields of Tolerance situation field and Message of tolerance
situation, character strings set in the Tolerance status table are
displayed according to the state of the signal (3 bits) at the PMC
address set in the Tolerance status signal address parameter. This
subscreen displays information for path 1 when the signal at the
address set in the Path selection signal address parameter is 0, and this
subscreen displays information for path 2 when the signal at the
address set in the Path selection signal address parameter is 1. This
subscreen is not used with the Power Mate i-LNA.
AXS2
0
0
1
1

AXS1
0
1
0
1

- 82 -

Selected axis
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Position

Name

Tolerance situation
Massage of tolerance situation

7.5.1.3

Program check subscreen


The program check subscreen displays the main program number (O
No. 1), subprogram number (O No. 2), sequence number (N No.)
currently being executed, the axis coordinates of 4 to 8 axes, feedrate
command, NC state, and part (3 lines) of the program currently being
executed. The axis coordinate display field displays one of three
patterns: the 4-axis display pattern, 6-axis display pattern, and 8-axis
display pattern. An appropriate display pattern is selected
automatically according to the number of axes set in the
Coordinate/Axis No. correspondence table of the [NC operation
screen (3/4) Parameter settings for axis state display] page. The
program display field displays the program currently being executed
in line 1, and displays a second program and third program to be
displayed in line 2 and 3, respectively. One line can display up to 26
characters. Those characters that exceed this limit are not displayed on
the screen.
A coordinate value to be displayed in the axis coordinate display field
can be selected from the eight types of data listed in the table below.
A selection can be made using signals input at the addresses indicated
in the table. When no signal is input, the absolute coordinate (program
coordinate) is selected.
With E3.02 and later, the CHNG POS button is provided in the
upper-right corner of the program check subscreen. This button also
enables you to switch among the types of coordinate values. Which
switching method is used depends on the setting of Change Position
added to the [NC operation screen (3/4) Parameter settings for axis
state display] page. If switching based on the CHNG POS button is
selected, the coordinate data displayed switches sequentially among
the five types of coordinate data indicated in the table each time you
press the button. In the upper-left corner of the program check
subscreen, the type of coordinate data currently selected is displayed.
Type of coordinate
Axi
s
na Axis coordinate
me
4 to 8 axes

O No. 1
O No. 2
N No.

CHNG
POS.

Feedrate F
NC state
display

Program being executed (3 lines)

- 83 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

No.

Selection based on
signals
Address (N0131)
#7
#6
#5
#4

Selection
based on the
CHNG POS
button

2
3

0
0

0
0

0
1

1
0

O
O

5
6

0
0

1
1

0
0

0
1

- 84 -

Type of data displayed

Absolute coordinate
(program coordinate)
Machine coordinate
Relative coordinate
Remaining amount of
movement
Skip position
Servo delay amount
Acceleration/deceleration
delay amount
Slide coordinate

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.5.2

Lamp Area and Button Area Setting - Setting Tables (1/4, 2/4)
[NC operation screen(1/4) Parameter settings for lamps.]
Screen name:
5
-1
CHECK

OK
0
No Lamp name
Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

LMP01
LMP02
LMP03
LMP04
LMP05
LMP06
LMP07
LMP08
LMP09
LMP10
LMP11
LMP12

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8

ADDITIONAL REFERENCE POS LAMPS (0:No, 1:Add)

S8_1
S8
S8
S8
S8

AXIS SELECTION PAGE SWITCHING BUTTON CAPTION

2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8

LMP05
LMP06
LMP07
LMP08

S8
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8

Cha.
row
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1

Cha.
scale
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1

N2
S8_1
S8
S8
S8
S8

N1
N1
N1
N1

B1
B1
B1
B1

Lamp colorPMC addres


ON OFF Lamp ON
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1
C1 C1
A1

C1
C1
C1
C1

C1
C1
C1
C1

A1
A1
A1
A1

The method of lamp and button setting is the same as for the fault
display screen. Up to two lines can be displayed on each of the buttons
BTN01 to BTN20. Up to three lines can be displayed on each of the
buttons BTN21 to BTN28.
With FPAssist Version 5.30 and later, lamp indications can be
changed between the lamps set for Nos. 5 to 8 (LMP05 to LMP08)
and the lamps set for Nos. 2-5 to 2-8. This can increase the origin
lamps for up to eight axes.
N2 : Set 1 to add the origin lamp extension screen. Set 0 if the
addition of the screen is unnecessary.
S8_1: When N2 is set to 1, the axis selection button appears in the
upper part of the menu button area. A name to be displayed on
the axis selection button can be specified with two lines each
consisting of eight characters (two lines, each consisting of up
to nine characters). The default is "SELECT/AXIS".
[NC operation screen(2/4) Parameter settings for buttons.]
Screen name:
0
CHECK

-1
OK
No
Btn name
Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
:
26
27
28

BTN01
BTN02
BTN03
BTN04
BTN05
BTN06
BTN07
BTN08
:
BTN26
BTN27
BTN28

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
:
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
:
S8
S8
S8

ADDITIONAL AXIS SELECTION BUTTONS (0:No, 1:A

2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15

BTN12
BTN13
BTN14
BTN15

S8
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
:
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
S8
:
S8
S8
S8

N5
S8
S8
S8
S8

S8
S8
S8
S8

Cha. Cha. Lamp color Frame color Type Group


row scale ON OFF ON OFF
No
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2
N3
N1
N1
N1
N1

B1
B1
B1
B1

- 85 -

C1
C1
C1
C1

C1
C1
C1
C1

C1
C1
C1
C1

C1
C1
C1
C1

N2
N2
N2
N2

N3
N3
N3
N3

Mode
N4
N4
N4
N4
N4
N4
N4
N4
:
N4
N4
N4
N4
N4
N4
N4

PMC address
Lamp Blink Lamp ON Btn Output
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
:
:
:
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1

A1
A1
A1
A1

A1
A1
A1
A1

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

With FPAssist Version 5.30 and later, like the lamp area, button
indications can be changed between the buttons set for Nos.12 to 15
(BTN12 to BTN15) and the buttons set for Nos. 2-12 to 2-15. This can
increase the axis selection buttons for up to eight axes.
N5 : Set 1 to add the axis selection button extension screen. Set 0 if
the addition of the screen is unnecessary. The caption of the
axis selection switch button is applicable to the setting of the
button area as well.

CAUTION
With FPAssist Version 5.30 or later, a group of the
buttons for Nos. 12 to 15 (BTN12 to BTN15) is
controlled independently of the other button groups
because these buttons are located on a different
child screen from the other buttons. It is thus
assumed that the group of the buttons for Nos. 12
to 15 (BTN12 to BTN15) is on one screen, while a
group of the buttons for Nos. 1 to 11 and Nos. 16
to 28 as well as a group of the buttons for Nos.
2-12 to 2-15 are on another screen. Exclusive
control is therefore not performed even if the same
group number is set for the three button groups. Be
careful when using the buttons as actuator buttons
or alternate buttons. For example, if the same
group number is set for the group of the buttons for
Nos. 12 to 15 (BTN12 to BTN15) and the group of
the buttons for Nos. 21 to 28 (BTN21 to BTN28),
the buttons for Nos. 12 to 15 and the buttons for
Nos. 21 to 28 function as selector switches in
different groups, and cannot function as selector
switches in one group.

- 86 -

B-66254EN/05

7.5.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Path Selection Signal Setting - Setting Table (3/4)


In the setting table (3/4), set the addresses of an alarm code, tolerance
status code, axis coordinate value, and axis selection signal. The
addresses based on the milling machine specification are set as the
defaults. So, when using a lathe, modify the defaults accordingly.
Moreover, set a path selection signal, axis names, and model name.
Do not modify the settings in
this table.

Set axis names to be


displayed on the axis
coordinate display
subscreen and
Alarm/Error code field.

Set CNC controlled axis


numbers and paths displayed
at coordinate display positions
on the program check screen.

Set the axis name


corresponding to a
CNC controlled axis
list.

A1_1 : Set the start address (least significant bit) of an alarm code
(ERR11 to ERR68) output from each path of the CNC. (The
default addresses based on the milling machine specification
are set. Path 1: M0016.0, Path 2: M0078.0)
A1_2 : Set the start address of a tolerance status signal (YA1 to YA3)
output from each path of the CNC. (The default addresses
based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1:
M0021.5, Path 2: M0083.5)
A2 : Set the start address of a coordinate value (MN0 to MN31)
output from each path of the CNC. (The default addresses
based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1:
M0022, Path 2: M0084)
A1_3 : Set the start address of an axis selection signal (AXS1, AXS2)
input to each path of the CNC. (The default addresses based
on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: N0015.1,
Path 2: N0055.1)
- 87 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

A1_4 : Set the address of the path selection signal used to choose
whether to display path 1 information or path 2 information.
Path 1 is selected when the path selection signal is set to 0.
Path 2 is selected when the path selection signal is set to 1.
N1 : Set whether to enable or disable the axis coordinate display
subscreen and program check subscreen. (Disable both
screens = 0, Enable the axis coordinate display subscreen = 1,
Enable the program check subscreen = 2, Enable the axis
coordinate display subscreen and program check subscreen =
3) (When using the Power Mate i-LNA, set 0 or 2.)
N2 : Set whether to use the button provided on the program check
subscreen (N2 = 0) or use the signals input to addresses
N131#7 to #4 (N2 = 1) when selecting a type of coordinate
data to be displayed on the axis coordinate display field of the
program check subscreen. (This function is available with
E3.02 and later.)
N3 : Set a CNC controlled axis number from 1 to 8 to specify
which CNC controlled axis coordinate to be displayed in the
axis coordinate display position on a program check subscreen.
Set 0 for those axis numbers that need not be displayed.
Depending on up to which line of the axis coordinate setting
table has axis numbers set, a program check subscreen for 4
axes, 6 axes, or 8 axes is automatically selected.
This input item is valid, independently of the second NC
operation screen. (This function is available with E3.02 and
later).
N4 : In the case of two-path control, specify the path number
corresponding to a CNC controlled axis number set in N3.
(1: Path 1, 2: Path 2, 0: Follows the path selection signal
(A1_4)) This input item is valid, independently of the second
NC operation screen. (This function is available with E3.02
and later).
S2
: Set the axis name corresponding to a CNC controlled axis list.
This setting is used for axis name display in the axis
coordinate display field on the program check subscreen. (2
half-size characters max.)
If this input item consists of a blank or space, the axis name
set in the NC parameter is used. This function is available
with E3.02.)
S6
: Set an axis name to be displayed in the axis name field of the
axis coordinate display subscreen or in the Alarm/Error code
display field of the alarm display subscreen. (Set the axis
name of an NC axis.)
S6_1 : Set an axis name to be displayed in the Alarm/Error code
display field of the alarm display subscreen. (Set the axis
name of an indexing axis. Axes 7 and 8 are not used.)
S9
: Enter an NC model name. Choose between FANUC 18i and
FANUC PMi.

- 88 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

CAUTION
When two NC operation screens are used, set the
same data except for the setting items of N3 and
N4.
An example of program check subscreen display when the following
axis selection setting is made for coordinate display on the program
check screen is given below:
coordinat Axis No.
1
4
2
5
3
6
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
8

Path
1
1
1
2
2
2

Display name
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Axis 4
Axis 5
Axis 6
Axis 7
Axis 8

Path 1
X1
Y1
Z1
A
B
C

Path 2
X2
Y2
Z2
U
V
W

Example of coordinate display on the program check subscreen


The coordinate of the 4th axis of path 1 is
A
00000.000
displayed, and the name "A" is displayed because
B
00000.111
the setting table indicates "A" for the 4th axis of the
C
00010.000
specified path. Similarly, the coordinates and axis
U
00020.222
names of other specified axes are displayed.
V
00003.333
As the coordinate of the 6th axis, the 6th axis of
W
00040.444
path 2 is specified. So, the coordinate of the 6th
axis of path 2 and the axis name "W" are
displayed.

- 89 -

B-66254EN/05

7.5.4

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Fault Message Setting - Setting Table (4/4)


In the setting table (4/4), the alarm messages corresponding to alarm
numbers are already set. Do not modify the settings.
If an alarm is issued from the CNC, FANUC PICTURE references the
setting table (4/4) and reads the alarm message corresponding to the
alarm number from the column of Alarm type, then displays the
message in the Alarm/Error code display field of the alarm display
subscreen.
[NC operation screen(4/4) Parameter settings for fault messages.]
Screen name:
-1 CHECK

OK
No
Alarm code
Axis
Alarm type
From
To
suffix
1
000
0255
0
P/S ALARM (1)
2
0260
0260
0
WAITING FOR|FIN SIGNAL
3
0261
0261
0
MOTION COMMAND
4
0262
0262
0
DWELL
5
0263
0263
0
IN-POSITION|CHECK
6
0264
0264
0
FEEDRATE|OVERRIDE 0%
7
0265
0265
0
INTERLOCK/|START-LOCK
8
0266
0266
0
SPINDLE SPEED|ARRIVAL CHECK
9
0273
0273
0
JOG FEEDRATE|OVERRIDE 0%
10
0274
0274
0
WAITING FOR|RESET, ESP, RRW OFF
11
0275
0275
0
EXTERNAL PROGRAM|NUMBER SEARCH
12
0280
0280
0
HALT BY:|EMERGENCY STOP ON
13
0281
0281
0
HALT BY:|NC RESET ON
14
0282
0282
0
HALT BY:|MDI RESET ON
15
0284
0284
0
HALT BY:|SERVO ALARM
16
0285
0285
0
HALT BY:FEED HOLD|*SP=0 or MODE change
17
0286
0286
0
HALT BY:|SINGLE BLOCK
18
0290
0290
0
HALT BY:FEED HOLD|ORE turned off
19
0291
0291
0
HALT BY:FEED HOLD|PNSC,PN1-40C changed
20
0300
0319
1
ABSOLUTE PULSE|CODER ALARM
21
0350
0399
1
SERIAL PULSE|CODER ALARM
22
0400
0499
1
SERVO ALARM
23
0500
0519
1
OVER TRAVEL ALARM
24
0700
0709
0
OVERHEAT ALARM
25
0740
0748
0
RIGID TAPPING|ALARM
26
0749
0762
0
SPINDLE ALARM
27
0800
0840
0
MACHINE ALARM
28
5000
5050
0
P/S ALARM (2)
29
5051
5057
0
SERIAL INTERFACE|ALARM
30
5058
6099
0
P/S ALARM (3)

NOTE
When a 2-path system is employed, and two NC
operation screens are created for each path, two
work sheets are created for each path. The settings
of 3/4 and 4/4 of these two sheets must be the
same. In ladder processing, ensure that the path
select signal is output to select the desired path
according to Screen selected address on [Setting
of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration].

- 90 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.6

TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 1 SCREEN

7.6.1

Screen Configuration
The tool exchange counter 1 screen consists of three counter area
pages each consisting of six counters (CNT01 to CNT06), three button
area pages each consisting of eighteen operation buttons (BTN01 to
BTN18), a reset button, and page switch button. When a value is
entered in the counter area, a ten-key pad for numeric input appears at
the center of the screen. Usually, no ten-key pad is displayed on the
screen. The tool exchange counter 1 screen is used to manage tool life.
NAME

PRELIM.

WARNING

STOP

COUNT

OPERATION BUTTON

CNT01

BTN01 BTN02 BTN03

CNT02

BTN04 BTN05 BTN06

CNT03

BTN07 BTN08 BTN09

Manual
Operation

CNT04

BTN10 BTN11 BTN12

Fault
Display

CNT05

BTN13 BTN14 BTN15

Running
Status

BTN16 BTN17 BTN18

Tool
Exchang

CNT06

1/3

RESET

- 91 -

B-66254EN/05

7.6.1.1

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Setting and display of pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values


When you press a button in the PRELIM, WARNING, or STOP
column, a ten-key pad appears at the center over the current screen.
The PREV. box of the ten-key pad displays the value set with the
touched button. When you enter a numeric value by touching numeric
keys, the entered value appears in the INPUT box. When you touch
the SET key, the ten-key pad disappears, and the numeric value
displayed in the INPUT box is set and displayed on the button from
which the ten-key pad was called. When you touch the CLOSE button,
the entered value is canceled (the previous value is preserved), and the
ten-key pad disappears. When you touch the CLR button, the value
displayed in the INPUT box is cleared. The ten-key pad name field
displays the ten-key pad name corresponding to a button set in the
[Tool exchange counter screen (2/3) Parameter settings for counter
signal] sheet. Range of values that can be set on each counter is 0 to
999999 (six digits).
NAME

PREV.

100

PREV. box

INPUT

25

INPUT box

CLR

7.6.1.2

Ten-key pad name

TOOL1 PRE-LIMIT

CLOSE

4
9

Numeric keys

0
SET

Measurement of the current value counter


In the [Tool exchange counter screen (1/3) Parameter settings for
counters] sheet, set a count signal address for each tool. Each time a
signal is input at the specified address, the current value is
incremented by one. The current value is incremented on the rising
edge of the signal. A count signal must have a width of 500 ms or
more.
Incremented here

Count signal
> 500 ms

- 92 -

B-66254EN/05

7.6.1.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Display of tool exchange information


When the current value of a counter reaches or exceeds the
pre-forecast or forecast value, the corresponding button is turned on in
orange. When the current value of a counter reaches or exceeds the
stop value, the corresponding STOP button is turned on in red. At this
time, a signal (1) is output to the count-up signal address set for the
button. The count-up signal continues to be output while the current
value of the counter is equal to or greater than the value set for the
button.
If 0 is set for all or any of the pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values,
the button color does not change and the count-up signal is not output
for the item(s) where 0 is set.
A STOP button is also turned on in red when a signal is input to the
stop turn-on address set for the STOP button. In this case, however,
the count-up signal is not output.
The conventional specification specifies that even if 0 is set for all of
the pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values, the current value counter
performs count operation when the count signal is input. With E3.02
and later, you can choose whether to perform current value count
operation or not in such a case.

7.6.1.4

Resetting of a current value counter


When you touch the name button of a tool in the name column, the
button is turned on in orange, indicating that the button is selected.
The buttons in the name column are selector switches, so that only one
button can be selected at a time. If another button is selected, the
selection of the previous button is released. When you touch the
selected button again, the button returns to the nonselected state.
If you touch the reset button when a name button is selected, the
current value of the selected tool is reset to 0. At this time, a 500-ms
wide pulse signal (1) is output to the reset notification address set for
the selected tool.
The current value of a tool can also be reset (on a rising edge) by
inputting a signal to the reset request address set for the tool. The
same pulse signal is output to the reset notification address in this case
as well. The reset request signal must have a width of 500 ms or more.
Reset here

Reset request signal


> 500 ms

- 93 -

B-66254EN/05

7.6.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Counter Setting - Setting Table (1/3)


In the setting table (1/3), set the tool names to be displayed on the
counter selection buttons (CNT01 to CNT06), and the addresses of a
count signal, reset signal, and reset notification signal for each tool.

S8

: Set a character string to be displayed on a counter selection


button (left side). (8 half-size characters (recommended), 9
half-size characters max.)
N1 : Number of lines of a character string above. (3 lines max.)
A1_1 : Set the address of a count signal for each tool. On a rising
edge of a count signal, the tool exchange counter is
incremented by one.
A1_2 : Set the address of a signal for resetting a tool exchange
counter. While a signal is ON, the counter is reset.
A1_3 : Set the address of a signal for notifying the PMC of a reset
operation. When a counter is reset by the reset button on the
screen or by a signal from the PMC, a reset notification signal
is output to the address set for the reset counter. A reset
notification signal is output as a pulse signal with a width of
about 500 ms.
N2 : Set whether to use a counter. (Use = 1, Not use = 0)
N3 : Set the number of tool exchange counter screens (1 to 3).
N4 : Select a current value counter operation to be performed if 0 is
set for all of the pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values. In the
case where N4 = 0 is specified, current value counter
operation is performed when a count signal is input although 0
is set for all of the pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values. In
the case where N4 = 1 is specified, current value counter
operation is not performed if 0 is set for all of the pre-forecast,
forecast, and stop values. (This function is available with
E3.02 and later.)

- 94 -

B-66254EN/05

7.6.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Ten-Key Pad Setting - Setting Table (2/3)


In the setting table (2/3), set a character string to be displayed in the
ten-key pad name field, and the addresses of count-up signals for
pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values.
With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, the current value can be set
using the ten-key pad. Usually, an interlock signal is provided to
disable the current value from being modified.

[Tool exchange counter screen(2/3) Parameter settings for counter signal]


Screen name:
CHECK
-1

OK
No Pg Part name
Pre forecast value
Forecast value
Ten-key title
Full count
Ten-key title
Full count
1
CNT01
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
2
CNT02
S20
3 1
CNT03
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
4
CNT04
S20
5
CNT05
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
6
CNT06
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
7
CNT01
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
8
CNT02
S20
9 2
CNT03
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
10
CNT04
S20
11
CNT05
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
12
CNT06
S20
13
CNT01
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
14
CNT02
S20
15 3
CNT03
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
16
CNT04
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
17
CNT05
S20
18
CNT06
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1

S20

Ten-key title
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20

Inter-rock signal address


Stop value
Full count
Lamp ON
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2

A1_3
Current value
Ten-key title
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20

: Set a character string (not longer than 20 half-size characters)


to be displayed on a ten-key pad for pre-forecast, forecast, or
stop value setting. Set a ten-key pad name for each counter
used. Do not include any space characters in a ten-key pad
name. (With E2.00 and later, a character string including
space characters can also be set.)
With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, set a ten-key pad name
for current value modification.
A1_1 : Set the address of a count-up signal to be output when the
value of a counter reaches or exceeds a pre-forecast, forecast,
or stop value.
A1_2 : Set the address of a signal for turning on a STOP button. In
cases other than count-up operation, a STOP button can be
turned on by inputting this signal.
A1_3 : With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, set the address of an
interlock signal for the ten-key pad for current value
modification. To be compatible with the old specifications
that do not allow current value modification, R9091.1 (which
is on at all times with the PMC) is set by default. Moreover,
when a blank is set, R9091.1 is used as an interlock signal.

- 95 -

B-66254EN/05

7.6.4

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3)


The method of button setting is the same as for the fault display screen.
Note, however, that a name not longer than three lines can be
displayed on a button.

- 96 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.7

TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 2 SCREEN


The tool exchange counter 2 screen is the same as the tool exchange
counter 1 screen except that all operation buttons are deleted and some
counters are added. The tool exchange counters operate in the same
way as for the tool exchange counter 1 screen. However, the range of
values that can be set and displayed on each counter is 0 to 99999
(five digits).
The tool exchange counter 1 screen and the tool exchange counter 2
screen cannot be used at the same time. Use one of the two screens at
a time.

NAME

PRELIM

WARN.

STOP

COUNT

PRELIM

WARN.

STOP

COUNT

CNT01

CNT09

CNT02

CNT10

CNT03

CNT11

CNT04

CNT12

CNT05

CNT13

Fault
Display

CNT06

CNT14

Running
Status

CNT07

CNT15

CNT08

CNT16

Manual
Operation

Tool
Exchange

1/3
RESET

- 97 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

The method of setting the table above is the same as for the tool
exchange counter 1 screen. A button name consisting of up to two
lines can be specified for the buttons CNT01 to CTN16.
[Tool exchange counter 2 screen(2/2) Parameter settings for Ten-key]
Screen name:
CHECK
1

NEED
No Pg Part name
Pre forecast value
Forecast value
Full count
Ten-key title
Full count
Ten-key title
A1_1
S20
A1_1
1
CNT01
S20
2
CNT02
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
3
CNT03
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
4 1
CNT04
S20
:
:
:
:
:
:
A1_1
S20
A1_1
14
CNT14
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
15
CNT15
S20
16
CNT16
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
17
CNT01
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
18
CNT02
S20
19
CNT03
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
20 2
CNT04
S20
:
:
:
:
:
:
30
CNT14
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
31
CNT15
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
32
CNT16
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
33
CNT01
S20
34
CNT02
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
35
CNT03
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
36 3
CNT04
S20
:
:
:
:
:
:
46
CNT14
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1
A1_1
S20
A1_1
47
CNT15
S20
48
CNT16
S20
A1_1
S20
A1_1

Ten-key title
S20
S20
S20
S20
:
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
:
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
:
S20
S20
S20

Inter-rock signal address


Stop value
Full count
Lamp ON
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
:
:
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
:
:
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
:
:
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2
A1_1
A1_2

A1_3
Current value
Ten-key title
S20
S20
S20
S20
:
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
:
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
:
S20
S20
S20

The method of setting the table above is the same as for the tool
exchange counter 1 screen.

- 98 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.8

TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN

7.8.1

Screen Configuration
The tool compensation counter screen consists of four counter area
pages each consisting of five counters (OFS01 to OFS05), four button
area pages each consisting of five operation buttons (BTN01 to
BTN05), a reset button, and page switch button. When a value is
entered in the counter area, a ten-key pad for numeric input appears at
the center of the screen. The tool compensation counter screen is used
to manage tool compensation values.
With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, when the Series 18i-LNB is
used, the number of counters can be increased up to 60 counters (12
screens). Even when two-path control is used, the total number of
tools of the two paths is 60.
NAME

LIMIT

CURRENT

INC./DEC

INCRMNT

OP.BUTTN

OFS01

__

BTN01

OFS02

__

BTN02
MANUL

SLIDE

OFS03

__

BTN03

OFS04

__

BTN04

ACT
OPRTN

OFS05

__

BTN05

Offset
Counter

NC
OPRTN

2/3

RESET

- 99 -

B-66254EN/05

7.8.1.1

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Setting and display of limit values


When you press a button in the LIMIT column, a ten-key pad appears
at the center over the current screen. The PREV. box of the ten-key
pad displays the value set with the touched button. When you enter a
numeric value by touching numeric keys, the entered value appears in
the INPUT box. When you touch the SET key, the ten-key pad
disappears, and the numeric value displayed in the INPUT box is set
and displayed on the button from which the ten-key pad was called.
When you touch the CLOSE button, the entered value is canceled (the
previous value is preserved), and the ten-key pad disappears. When
you touch the CLR key, the value displayed in the INPUT box is
cleared. The ten-key pad name field displays the ten-key pad name
corresponding to a button set in the [Tool compensation counter
screen (1/3) Parameter settings for counters] sheet.
NAME

Ten-key pad name

T1 OFFSET X LIMT

PREV.

100

PREV. bo x

INPUT

25

INPUT box

CLR

CLOSE

4
9

5
0

Numeric keys

SET

NOTE
Use NC parameters to set incremental values.

7.8.1.2

Compensation operation
When you touch a + button in the INC/DEC column, an incremental
value is added to the current value of the corresponding tool. If the
current value has reached a limit value or greater, touching the +
button does not increment the current value (in the case of the
18i-LNA). When you touch a - button in the INC/DEC column, an
incremental value is subtracted from the current value of the
corresponding tool. When the current value of a tool reaches a set
limit value or greater, the corresponding LIMIT button is turned on in
red. At this time, a signal (1) is output to the count-up signal address
set for the tool. The count-up signal continues to be output while the
current value is equal to or greater than the limit value.
If 0 is set for a limit value, the count-up signal is not output. Moreover,
the color of the LIMIT button does not change. If a limit value is
changed to 0 while the count-up signal is output, the count-up signal is
set to 0, and the red color of the LIMIT button disappears. (This
function is available with E3.02 and later.)
- 100 -

B-66254EN/05

7.8.1.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Display and resetting of a current value


When you touch the name button of a tool in the name column, the
button is turned on in orange, indicating that the button is selected.
The buttons in the name column are selector switches, so that only one
button can be selected at a time. If another button is selected, the
selection of the previous button is released. When you touch the
selected button again, the button returns to the nonselected state. If
you touch the reset button while a name button is selected, the current
value of the selected tool is reset to 0.

7.8.1.4

Compensation processing
With the 18i-LNA, incremental offset operations such as incremental
value addition/subtraction, offset value clearing, and determination of
whether a limit value is reached are processed using CNC functions.
Operations on the operator's panel screen are converted to a sequence
of the offset-related signals of the CNC (INC1 to INC6, +INC, -INC,
FINC, OFS0, OMAX), which is then output. So, by assigning CNC
input/output addresses (on the M-NET interface) to these signals,
compensation operations can be processed only between the operator's
panel and CNC. If compensation processing needs to be controlled
from the PMC, do not directly connect offset-related signals
transferred to and from the operator's panel with the CNC, but ensure
that those signals are once received and processed by the PMC then
are returned to the CNC.
In the case of the Power Mate i-LNA, ensure that offset-related
signals transferred to and from the operator's panel are once
received by the PMC, then compensation value I/O input or halt
compensation value I/O input is used. For PMC processing, see
the ladder diagram of Appendix B.
If a counter operation such as touching a + button, - button, or the
reset button on the screen, the screen display cannot be switched from
the tool compensation counter screen to another screen and is locked
until the offset completion signal or offset clear completion signal is
received. (With FANUC PICTURE of E2.00 and later, the screen is
not locked even in such a case.) To prevent such a situation from
occurring, ensure that the +/- INC signal output from the screen is
blocked if a compensation operation is performed manually on the
screen while a compensation operation is performed on the PMC. In
addition, ensure that PMC ladder processing is performed to return the
+/-INC signal as the offset completion signal or offset clear
completion signal to the screen.

- 101 -

B-66254EN/05

7.8.1.5

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

When two paths are used


When the NC is based on the 2-path control specification, this screen
is used to control the tool compensation values of both path 1 and path
2. So, this screen allows the setting of up to 4 pages, that is, up to 20
counters. The counter name setting table has a column for specifying
to which path a tool belongs. The counter signal setting table allows
you to set the addresses of counter operation signals for each of path 1
and path 2.

7.8.1.6

Interlock (available with E3.02 and later)


With the interlock signal, manual operation of the tool compensation
counter screen can be disabled. While the interlock signal is set to 1,
the +/- buttons and the reset button are disabled. Set the interlock
signal in the interlock signal address field of [Tool compensation
counter screen (2/3) Parameter settings for counter signals].

- 102 -

B-66254EN/05

7.8.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Setting of Counter Names and So Forth - Setting Table (1/3)


In the setting table (1/3), set tool names to be displayed on the tool
selection buttons (OFS01 to OFS05), a character string to be displayed
in the ten-key pad name field, count-up signal addresses, and so forth.
With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, page 5 and up can be set when
the Series 18i-LNB is used.

[Tool compensation counter screen(1/3) Parameter settings for counters]


12 Screen name: TOOLOFS
-1
CHECK

No. of pages
N4
0
OK
No Pg Part name
Name
Cha.
row
1
OFS01
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
2
OFS02
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
0 1
OFS03
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
4
OFS04
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
5
OFS05
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
6
OFS01
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
7
OFS02
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
8 2
OFS03
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
9
OFS04
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
10
OFS05
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
11
OFS01
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
12
OFS02
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
13 3
OFS03
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
14
OFS04
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
15
OFS05
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
16
OFS01
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
17
OFS02
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
18 4
OFS03
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
19
OFS04
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1
20
OFS05
S8
S8
S8
S8
N1

S8
N1
S20

A1
N2

N3
N4

Ten-key title
Limit value
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20
S20

Full count output Path

address
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2
A1
N2

Mode
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3
N3

: Set a character string to be displayed on a tool selection button


(left side). (8 half-size characters (recommended), 9 half-size
characters max.)
: Set the number of lines of a character string above. (4 lines
max.)
: Set a character string to be displayed on a ten-key pad called to
set a limit value. (20 half-size characters max.)
Set a ten-key pad name for each compensation counter limit
value used. Do not include any space characters in a ten-key
pad name. With E2.00 and later, a character string including
space characters can also be set.
: Set the address of a count-up signal to be output when the value
of a tool compensation counter reaches or exceeds a limit value.
: Specify to which path a tool belongs. (Path 1 = 1, Path 2 = 2)
Arrange tools for path 1 and tools for path 2 in this order.
Ensure that tools of path 1 and tools of path 2 are not mixed
with each other.
: Set whether to use a tool counter. (Use = 1, Not use = 0)
: Set the number of tool compensation counter screens (1 to 4).
With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, a number from 1 to 12
can be set when the Series 18i-LNB is used.

- 103 -

B-66254EN/05

7.8.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Counter Signal Setting - Setting Table (2/3)


In
the
setting
table
(2/3),
set
the
addresses
of
incremental-offset-related signals. The addresses based on the milling
machine specification are set as the defaults. So, when using a lathe,
modify the defaults accordingly.

A1_1 : The offset register selection signals (INC1 to INC6) are output
to a set address. (The default addresses based on the milling
machine specification are set. Path 1: N0007.0, Path 2:
N0047.0)
A1_2 : The incremental offset signal (+INC) is output to a set address.
(The default addresses based on the milling machine
specification are set. Path 1: N0007.6, Path 2: N0047.6)
A1_3 : The incremental offset signal (-INC) is output to a set address.
(The default addresses based on the milling machine
specification are set. Path 1: N0007.7, Path 2: N0047.7)
A1_4 : Set an address for referencing the offset completion signal
(FINC). (The default addresses based on the milling machine
specification are set. Path 1: M0007.4, Path 2: M0069.4)
A1_5 : Set an address for referencing the offset completion signal
(OMAX). (The default addresses based on the milling
machine specification are set. Path 1: M0007.5, Path 2:
M0069.5)
A1_6 : Set an address for referencing the offset completion signal
(OFS0). (The default addresses based on the milling machine
specification are set. Path 1: M0007.6, Path 2: M0069.6)
N1 : Set the number of decimal places used when an offset value is
displayed.
Usually, set 3 to match the increment system of an NC offset
value.
A1_7 : A selected offset incremental value (4 bytes) is output to a set
address (for the Power Mate i-LNA). This item need not be set
for the 18i-LNA.

- 104 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

NOTE
When performing an incremental-offset-related
operation with a PMC ladder, change the
addresses in the table above to PMC addresses
and switch the operator's panel signals to PMC
signals on the PMC for transfer to the CNC.
A1_8 : The signal of an address set here is used as the interlock signal.
(This function is available with E3.02 and later.)

7.8.4

Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3)

With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, page 5 and up can be set when
the Series 18i-LNB is used.
The method of button setting is the same as for the fault display
screen.

- 105 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.9

RUNNING DISPLAY SCREEN

7.9.1

Screen Configuration
The running display screen consists of a lamp area, numeric display
area, and running display area. The functions of the lamp area and
numeric display area are the same as those of the manual operation
screen. The running display area consists of 135 lamps used to display
the running statuses of stations. The running statuses of up to 15
stations can be displayed.

LMP01

LMP02

LMP03

LMP04

LMP05

LMP06

LMP07

LMP08

LMP09

LMP10

LMP11

LMP12

LMP13

LMP14

LMP15

LMP16

LMP17

LMP18

LMP19

LMP20

LMP21

LMP22

LMP23

LMP24

KOGU1
KOGU2
KOGU3
KOGU4

NUM01
NUM02
NUM03
NUM04

STATION
L

CONT.

10

11

12

13

14

15

Lamp
Page

Number
Page

Flow
Diagn.
Cycle
Time

COMPLETED

Running
Status

UNIT RUNNING
JIG UNCLAMP
LOADER RUN

Fault
Display

JIG CLAMPED
UNIT RUNNING
COMPLETED
R

3/3

CONT.

One setting table provides setting lines for two pages for each of the
lamp area and numeric display area. Whether to use the second page
can be specified in the column of Use 2nd page of the right-hand table
of the setting table (2/3).

- 106 -

B-66254EN/05

7.9.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3)

The method of lamp setting is the same as for the fault display screen.

7.9.3

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3)

The method of numeric display setting is the same as for the manual
operation screen.

- 107 -

B-66254EN/05

7.9.4

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Running Display Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3)

A1: Set the address of a signal for turning on a lamp.

- 108 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.10

RUNNING DISPLAY 2 SCREEN

7.10.1

Screen Configuration
The running display 2 screen consists of a lamp area, numeric display
area, and running display area. The functions of the lamp area and
numeric display area are the same as those of the manual operation
screen. The running display area consists of 240 lamps whose display
colors can be set. The running display area is used to display the
running statuses of stations. Two screens of the running display area
can be displayed by switching. One screen can display the running
statuses of up to 15 stations. Station names and running status names
can be set freely.

LMP01

LMP02

LMP03

LMP04

LMP05

LMP06

LMP07

Lamp
Page

LMP08

LMP09

LMP10

LMP11

LMP12

LMP13

LMP14

Station

LMP15

LMP16

LMP17

LMP18

LMP19

LMP21

LMP22

LMP23

LMP24

NUM01
NUM02
NUM03
NUM04

Number
Page

LMP20

KOGU1
KOGU2
KOGU3
KOGU4

STATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

10

11

12

13

14

15

Flow
Diagn.
Cycle
Time
Running
Status
Fault
Display

3/3

One setting table provides setting lines for two pages for each of the
lamp area and numeric display area. Whether to use the second page
can be specified in the column of Use 2nd page of the right-hand table
of the setting table (2/3).

- 109 -

B-66254EN/05

7.10.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3)

The method of lamp setting is the same as for the fault display screen.

7.10.3

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3)


The method of numeric display setting is the same as for the manual
operation screen, except that the setting item (LMP2_SEL) is added to
the right-hand table. Specify whether to create the second page of the
running display area.

N3_3 : Set whether to create the second page of the running display
area. (Use = 1, Not use = 0)
S8_2 : Character string to be displayed on a page switch button

- 110 -

B-66254EN/05

7.10.4

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Operation Indicator Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3)

S14: Set the name of a running status to be displayed on the left side
of the running display area. Up to 16 items can be wet.
The names set on the first page are displayed on the second page
as well.
S3: Set a station name. Alphanumeric characters can be used.
A1: Set the address of a signal for turning on an operation indicator
lamp.
C1: Select the ON color and OFF color of an operation indicator
lamp.
W
White

R
Red

G
Green

B
Blue

- 111 -

O
Orange

Y
Yellow

WB
Light blue

BL
Black

GL
Gray

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.11

FAULT COUNT SCREEN (USED FOR 36 AND 168 FAULT


ITEMS)

7.11.1

Screen Configuration
The fault count screen is used to count and display the number of
faults and the fault stop times for up to 168 fault items (408 fault items
with E2.00 and later). The operator's panel contains registers for
storing the fault stop time and the number of faults for five days
(shifts). The values of today (shift), the previous day (shift), and one
week (past five shifts) are displayed on the screen.

FAULT NUMBER LIST


TODAY
NAME
NUMBER

ACC.TIME

1/3
BEFORE
NUMBER

ACC.TIME

1 WEEK
NUMBER

ACC.TIME

Fault
Number
Cycle
Time
Running
Status
Fault
Message

PAGE

3/3

- 112 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.11.1.1 Counting of the number of faults and measurement of stop


time

The operator's panel performs processing necessary for display of this


screen, such as the counting of the number of faults, measurement of
fault occurrence time, storing of count values, and calculation of
cumulative values.
The time from the rising edge of a fault signal set in the [Parameter
settings for Fault number list screen] sheet to the rising edge of the
timer stop signal is measured as a fault occurrence time. Moreover,
the number of rising edges of the fault signal is counted as the number
of faults. If the fault signal rises again during a fault occurrence time,
the occurrence of a fault is not assumed, but the additional rising edge
is ignored. Each signal must have a pulse width of 500 ms or more.
Fault occurrence time

Fault signal
> 500ms

Timer stop
signal

Ignored

> 500ms

The measured values displayed on the screen are stored on the SRAM
of the CNC, and are preserved even when the power to the CNC is
turned off. The stored measured values can be deleted by setting the
alarm counter initialization signal set on the [Setting of the entire
system (2/4) Setting of global screen] sheet to ON for the time set in
Initialization signal on time of the same sheet or more. The stored
measured values can also be deleted by all-clear operation of the
SRAM of the CNC.
Set the character strings displayed on the second line (TODAY,
BEFORE, WEEK) of the title of this screen in the [Setting of the
entire system (3/4) Shift information settings] sheet. Depending on
one-shift or two-shift setting, the corresponding title is selected and
displayed. The default titles are as follows:
For one-shift setting: TODAY, BEFORE, 1WEEK
For two-shift setting: CURRENT, PREV., 5 SHIFTS

- 113 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.11.1.2 Page switch method


Pages as many as the value set in No. of pages of the [Parameter
settings for Fault number list screen] sheet are created. You can switch
between pages by using the two arrow buttons or the PAGE button at
the bottom of the screen. When you press the PAGE button, the page
selection screen appears over the fault count screen. On the page
selection screen, the page selection buttons corresponding to the pages
of the fault count screen are arranged. When you press a page
selection button, the page selection screen disappears, and the page
corresponding to the pressed button is displayed. On each page
selection button, the default character string (page xx) is set. However,
you can set a desired character string for display. The number of page
selection buttons is 34 with E.200 an later, and is 14 with the earlier
editions.

PAGE 1

PAGE 6

PAGE 11

PAGE 2

PAGE 7

PAGE 12

PAGE 3

PAGE 8

PAGE 13

PAGE 4

PAGE 9

PAGE 14

PAGE 5

PAGE 10
Page selection screen

7.11.1.3 Relationship with the operational situation screen


The data of items 1 to 6 and 8 to 10 of the operational situation screen
is displayed using the measurement function of this screen. So, the
data to be displayed on the operational situation screen must also be
set on this screen. For details, see the description of the operational
situation screen.

- 114 -

B-66254EN/05

7.11.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Fault Count Related Setting - Setting Table (1/1)


Set fault names, the addresses of fault count signals, and character
strings to be displayed on the page selection buttons of the fault count
screen.

NOTE
A setting table for 34 pages is available with E2.00
and later.
S22 : Set the name of a fault item.
A1_1 : Set the address of a signal for starting the counting of the
number of faults and stop time.
A1_2 : Set the address of a signal for stopping the counting of fault
stop time.
N1 : Set the number of pages of the fault count screen. (Up to 34
pages can be used with E2.00 and later, and up to 14 pages
can be used with the earlier editions.)
S10 : Set a character string to be displayed on a page selection
button of the fault count screen. Up to two lines can be
specified for display. By default, page xx is set. Set a desired
character string if necessary.

- 115 -

B-66254EN/05

7.12

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

CYCLE TIME MEASUREMENT SCREEN


NOTE
When a cycle time measurement screen and cycle
time setting screen are incorporated, a cycle
monitor screen, which can be created with the
Series 18i-LNB, cannot be created. Only the former
screens or the latter screen can be incorporated at
a time.
FPAssist Version 6.04 and later support switching
between these screens to enable only either of
them to be used on a CNC.

7.12.1

Screen Configuration
The cycle time measurement screen enables you to measure cycle
times for up to 36 types of operation items and display the latest ten
measurement values. Cycle times are measured, regardless of whether
this screen is displayed. You can choose a unit of displayed cycle time
data between seconds and 0.1 seconds.

CYCLE TIME MEASUREMENT LIST


OPERATION ITEM

STD.

1/3
3

10

Fault
Number
Cycle
Time
Running
Status
Fault
Message
STANDARD

3/3

SET

Processing required to display this screen, such as the measurement of


cycle times and the storing of measured values, is performed on the
operator's panel. Cycle times are measured on the operator's panel,
using the measurement start signals and measurement stop signals set
on the [Parameter settings for Cycle time measurement list screen]
sheet.
Cycle times are measured using one of two types of methods: edge
type and level type. One of the types must be selected according to the
setting of a measurement type. (This function is available with E3.02
and later.)
- 116 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.12.1.1 Edge type operation


The time from a rising edge of the measurement start signal to a rising
edge of the measurement stop signal is measured. Each of the signals
must have a pulse width of 500 ms or more. Each time a new
measurement is made, the measured values displayed in columns 1 to
9 are shifted to right, and a newly measured cycle time value is
entered in column 1. The measured value that has been displayed in
column 10 is discarded.
Cycle time
Measurement
start signal
> 500ms

Measurement
stop signal

> 500ms

The measured values displayed on this screen are stored in the SRAM
of the CNC, and are preserved even when the power to the CNC is
turned off. The stored measured values can be deleted by setting the
cycle time counter initialization signal set on the [Setting of the entire
system (2/4) Setting of global screen] sheet to ON for the time set in
Initialization signal on time of the same sheet or more. The stored
measured values can also be deleted by all-clear operation of the
SRAM of the CNC.

7.12.1.2 Level type operation


The measurement start, measurement stop, and screen shift operations
are the same as for the edge type. However, when the measurement
start signal is set to 0 after the start of a time measurement, the time
measurement is suspended. The time measurement is restarted when
the measurement start signal is set to 1. So, the times during which the
measurement start signal is 1 are measured in the period from a rising
edge of the measurement start signal to a rising edge of the
measurement stop signal. (This function is available with E3.02 and
later.)
Measurement
start/screen shift

Measurement
Measurement
Measurement suspended

Measurement
start signal
Measurement
stop signal

> 500ms

> 500ms
Measurement
stop

- 117 -

Measurement
start/screen shift

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

The measured values displayed on this screen are stored in the SRAM
of the CNC, and are preserved even when the power to the CNC is
turned off. The stored measured values can be deleted by setting the
cycle time counter initialization signal set on the [Setting of the entire
system (2/4) Setting of global screen] sheet to ON for the time set in
Initialization signal on time of the same sheet or more. The stored
measured values can also be deleted by all-clear operation of the
SRAM of the CNC.

7.12.2

Cycle Time Item Name and Measurement Signal Setting Setting Table (1/1)
In the setting table (1/1), set cycle time item names, and the addresses
of cycle time measurement start and stop signals.

S20
A1_1
A1_2
N1

N2
N3
G1
N4

:
:
:
:

Set the name of an item for cycle time measurement.


Set the address of a measurement start signal.
Set the address of a measurement stop signal.
Set the number of decimal places (0 or 1) for cycle time
display. If 0 is set (so that no decimal places are displayed), a
cycle time is displayed in seconds. If 1 is set (so that a cycle
time is displayed to one decimal place), a cycle time is
displayed in 0.1 seconds.
: Set whether to use an item. (Use = 1, Not use = 0)
: Set the number of cycle time measurement screens (1 to 3).
: Set a cycle time setting screen name.
: Select a measurement type from 0:Edge type and 1:Level type.
(This function is available with E3.02 and later.)

- 118 -

B-66254EN/05

7.13

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

CYCLE TIME SETTING SCREEN


The cycle time setting screen is used to set a standard value displayed
in the standard value field of the cycle time measurement screen.
Register the screen in a spare line on the [Setting of the entire system
(1/4) Screen registration] sheet.

CYCLE TIME STANDARD VALUE SETTING

CYL01

CYL03

CYL05

CYL07

CYL09

CYL11

CYL13

CYL15

CYL17

CYL02

CYL04

CYL06

CYL08

CYL10

CYL12

CYL14

CYL16

CYL18

CYL19

CYL21

CYL23

CYL25

CYL27

CYL29

CYL31

CYL33

CYL35

CYL20

CYL22

CYL24

CYL26

CYL28

CYL30

CYL32

CYL34

CYL36

RETURN

S20: Set a character string to be displayed on a ten-key pad called to


set a standard cycle time value. For those lines that have 1 set in
Mode, be sure to set a ten-key pad name. Do not include any
space characters in a ten-key pad name.
G1: Set a cycle time measurement screen name.
(In the columns of Decimal point and Mode, those values that are
set on the cycle time measurement screen are automatically set
when you press the CHECK button.)
- 119 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.14

OPERATIONAL SITUATION SCREEN

7.14.1

Screen Configuration

OPERATIONAL SITUATION
NAME

TODAY

BEFORE

2/01

17:10

1WEEK

NUMBER ACC.TIME NUMBER ACC.TIME NUMBER ACC.TIME

[ITEM1]
EQIPMENT FAULT
[ITEM2]
TOOL CHANGE
[ITEM3]
QUALITY CHECK
[ITEM4]
CONTINUOUS OFF
[ITEM5]
PARTS FULL
[ITEM6]
NO PART
[ITEM7]
CYCLE TIME
[ITEM8]
MACHINED PART
[ITEM9]
OPERATION RATE
[ITEM10]
OK PART RATE
COMMUNICATION
STATUS

2001

<1>

<1>

<1>

<2>

<2>

<2>

<3>

<3>

<3>

<4>

<4>

<4>

<5>

<5>

<5>

<6>

<6>

<6>

0.0 SEC
0

100.0 %

100.0 %

100.0 %

0.0 %

0.0 %

0.0 %

F
3/3

R100
R101

Items 1 to 6 display specified fault items among the fault items set on
the fault count screen. The same data as set on the fault count screen is
displayed. In these items, EQUIPMENT FAULT, TOOL CHANGE,
QUALITY CHECK, CONTINUOUS OFF, PARTS FULL, and NO
PART are set. Set the corresponding fault item numbers in the table of
the [Parameter settings for Operational situation screen] sheet.
The default name of item 7 is CYCLE TIME. This item displays the
current value of a specified item among the items set on the cycle time
measurement screen. In the table, set the number of the item for the
entire cycle time.
The default name of item 8 is MACHINED PART. This item displays
the current (today) count value of a specified item among the fault
items. To display the number of machined parts on this screen, the
number of machined parts must be counted as a fault count
beforehand.

- 120 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Item 9 displays a value calculated using the formula below based on


the values of items 1 to 6 and collection time (default: 460 minutes).
The default name of item 9 is OPERATION RATE.
Operation rate =
(Collection time-<1>-<2>-<3>-<4>-<5>-<6>) /
(Collection time-<5>-<6>)
If the measured time values of any of items 1 to 6 are duplicate, no correct
operation rate can be found. Ensure that multiple items are not measured
for one cause. If items 1 to 6 are not set, no correct operation rate can be
found. If items 1 to 6 include an unnecessary item, specify the number by
setting a dummy fault monitor counter.
With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, however, an improvement is made to
calculate unnecessary items as 0. So, no dummy counter needs to be set.

Item 10 displays a value calculated using the formula below based on


the count values of two specified items among the fault items. To
display this item, the number of OK output parts and the number of
input parts must be counted as fault counts beforehand. In items 10-1
and 10-2 of the [Parameter settings for Operational situation screen]
sheet, specify the fault item numbers corresponding to the number of
OK output parts and the number of input items, respectively. The
default name of item 10 is OK PART RATE.
OK part rate=
Number of OK output parts (data specified in item 10-1) /
Number of input parts (data specified in item 10-2)
Set the character strings (TODAY, BEFORE, 1WEEK) to be
displayed on the second line of the title of this screen in the [Setting of
the entire system (3/4) Shift information settings] sheet. Depending on
one-shift or two-shift setting, the corresponding title is selected and
displayed. The default titles are as follows:
For one-shift setting: TODAY, BEFORE, 1WEEK
For two-shift setting: CURRENT, PREV., 5 SHIFTS
For the fault data numbers set in items 8, 10-1, and 10-2, only the
number of occurrences is count, and no time measurement is made. If
the number of machined parts, the number of OK output parts, and the
number of input parts are displayed on the tool exchange counter
screen, set a count signal on both of the tool exchange count screen
and fault count screen.

- 121 -

B-66254EN/05

7.14.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Operational Situation Item Setting


The operational situation screen is displayed using the values of fault
counters and the cycle time counters. In the setting table, set the fault
counter numbers and cycle time counter numbers corresponding to
operational situation items.

S20

: Set the name of an operational situation item. The default


character string is indicated in parentheses.
N1_1 : Set the fault monitor counter number (fault item number) with
which an operational situation item is set.
N1_2 : Set the cycle time counter number with which a cycle time to
be displayed on the operational situation screen is set.
N2 : Set a collection time used for operation rate calculation. The
default value (460 minutes) is set.
S5
: Name of an ANDON signal
A2 : Address of an ANDON signal (2 bytes)

- 122 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.15

MANUAL OPERATION 2 SCREEN

7.15.1

Screen Specification

LMP01

LMP02

LMP03

LMP04

LMP05

LMP06

LMP07

Lamp
Page

LMP08

LMP09

LMP10

LMP11

LMP12

LMP13

LMP14

Button
Page

LMP15

LMP16

LMP17

LMP18

LMP19

******

******

LMP20

LMP21

LMP22

LMP23

LMP24

******

BTN01

BTN02

BTN03

BTN04

BTN05

BTN06

BTN07

Fault
Display

BTN08

BTN09

BTN10

BTN11

BTN12

BTN13

BTN14

Tool
Change

BTN15

BTN16

BTN17

BTN18

BTN19

BTN20

BTN21

BTN22

BTN23

BTN24

BTN25

BTN26

BTN27

BTN28

Number
Page
Manual
Operation

Tool
Offset

1/3

The manual operation 2 screen consists of the same display areas as


the manual operation screen except that a motion sequence display
subscreen is added to the numeric display area. By using the page
switch button of the numeric display area, the screen display is
switched. The motion sequence display subscreen displays the current
motion name together with the following and preceding motion names
as shown below. Based on the current motion number posted from the
PMC, these names are displayed by referencing the motion number
and motion name correspondence table set on the [Manual operation
screen 2 (4/4) Settings for numeric display & motion sequence
display] sheet.
1
2
3

[Previous motion name]


[Name of motion currently in progress]
[Next motion name]
Motion sequence display subscreen

- 123 -

B-66254EN/05

7.15.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Lamp and Button Area Setting - Setting Table (1/4, 2/4, 3/4)

The method of lamp and button setting is the same as for the manual
operation screen.

N1_1 : Set whether to use page 2 of the lamp display area. (Use = 1,
Not use = 0)
N1_2 : Set whether to use page 2 of the manual button area. (Use = 1,
Not use = 0)

- 124 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

N1_3 : Set whether to use page 2 of the numeric display area. (Use =
1, Not use = 0)
S8
: Set a character string to be displayed on a page switch button.
N2 : Set whether to use signal monitor display. (Use = 1, Not use =
0)

7.15.3

Numeric Display Area and Motion Sequence Setting - Setting


Table (4/4)
The method of numeric display area setting is the same as for the
manual operation screen. In the two tables below, set motion sequence
display items.
[Manual operation screen 2 (4/4) Settings for numeric display & motion sequence display]
Screen name:
1
CHECK

NEED
No Pg Part name PMC address
Decimal
Name
Mode
No
point
1
A2
N1
S14
N2
2
1
KOGU1
2 1 KOGU2
A2
N1
S14
N2
3
A2
N1
S14
N2
4
3
KOGU3
4
KOGU4
N4
N1
S8
N2
5
A2
N1
S14
N2
6
5
KOGU1
6 2 KOGU2
A2
N1
S14
N2
7
A2
N1
S14
N2
8
7
KOGU3
8
KOGU4
N4
N1
S8
N2
9
10
Motion sequence display ON/OFF
N3_1
11
The number of motion items
N3_2
12
Current motion number adr.
N3_3
:
70
71
72

Motion name
S12
S12
S12
S12
S12
S12
S12
S12
S12
S12
S12
S12
:
S12
S12
S12

N3_1 : Set whether to enable or disable motion sequence display.


(Enable 1, Disable = 0)
N3_2 : Set the number of motion items to be displayed in the motion
sequence display area (number of final motions).
N3_3 : Set the address where the number of an item currently in
motion to be displayed in the motion sequence area is stored.
Store the number of an item currently in motion in binary
format (2 bytes).
S12 : Set an operation name to be displayed in the motion sequence
display area with up to 12 characters.

NOTE
When using multiple manual operation 2 screens,
set the same values in the setting tables for each
screen.

- 125 -

B-66254EN/05

7.16

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

OPERATION STATUS MONITOR SCREEN


The operation status monitor screen is used for monitoring of the
command signal and motion end signal of each motion. Up to three
pages or up to 72 items can be monitored.

OPERATION MONITOR
No

OPERATION

1/3

CMD

END

No

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

10

22

11

23

12

24

OPERATIONNAM

CMD

END

3/3

S24 : Set the name of a motion.


A1_1 : Set the address of the command signal of a motion.
- 126 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

A1_2 : Set the address of the end signal (motion end) of a motion.
N1 : Set the number of pages of the operation status monitor screen.
(Set motion items sequentially starting with No. 1 on the table
above. If there is an item where neither a name nor a PLC
address is set, the data up to the item immediately above such
an item is regarded as valid.)

- 127 -

B-66254EN/05

7.17

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDANCE SCREEN


CAUTION
With FANUC PICTURE E2.00 and later, a flow
diagnostic screen is added. When creating a
screen for diagnosis, use the flow diagnostic
screen.
The troubleshooting guidance screen is used to display the presumed
cause of an alarm issued from the machine and a corrective action to
be taken. With FANUC PICTURE of E2.00 and later, a flow
diagnostic screen is added. When creating a screen for diagnosis, use
the flow diagnostic screen.

[TITLE]

Presumed cause :
Manual
Operation

Measure :

Tool
Change
Tool
Offset
Fault
Display
PREV.
FAULT

NEXT
FAULT

DETAIL

FAULT
RESET

3/3

When a 16-bit binary alarm code output from the PMC is received
through the alarm code address set in [Setting of the entire system
(2/4)], the data of the same screen number as the received code is
displayed on this screen from the data set in the table below. Up to
seven alarm codes can be received at a time, and a fault to be
displayed can be selected using the PREV. FAULT or NEXT FAULT
button. The display of the measure field can be scrolled using the
and buttons. When you press the DETAIL button, the screen display
jumps to the detailed guidance screen. When you press the FAULT
RESET button, a signal (ON) is output to the address set in the output
address (A1).

- 128 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

N1

: Set a guidance screen number. When an alarm code is sent


from the PLC/PMC through an address set in [Setting of the
entire system (2/4)], the operator's panel displays the data of
the same screen number as the received alarm code on the
guidance screen.
S3
: Fault code
S1
: Part code, check item count code
S16
: Suffix/Alarm No. (NC error code)
Use half-size characters for S1, S3, and S16.
S17
: Specify the same fault reset button as used on other screens.
When the same button as the fault reset button (named
BTN07) on the fault display screen (named IJYOU) is to be
created on the troubleshooting guidance screen, for example,
enter IJYOU BTN07.
S32_1 : Character string to be displayed in the title field
S10
: Character string to be displayed at the start of the presumed
cause field. The default is Presumed cause:. After this
character string, the character string set in S22 is displayed.
S22
: Character string to be displayed in line 1 of the presumed
cause field
S32_2 : Character string to be displayed in lines 2 and 3 of the
presumed cause field.
For S22 and S32, half-size or full-size characters can be used.

- 129 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

S10
S255

: Character string to be displayed at the start of the measure


field. After this character string, the character string set in
S255 is displayed.
: Character string to be displayed in the measure field. For
new line operation, enter ALT + Return. If a character string
longer than 255 half-size characters is to be used, enter the
characters beyond the 255 characters in the right-hand
column. The character strings entered in the left-hand and
right-hand columns are concatenated when displayed.

The character strings entered above are displayed using enlarged


characters on the screen.

7.17.1

Method of Alarm Code Transfer


Alarm codes must be transferred from the PLC/PMC to the operator's
panel periodically. If the same alarm code cannot be received even
when the time set in Alarm expiration time of [Setting of the entire
system (2/4)] has elapsed, the alarm is assumed to be reset. The
operator's panel can receive and display up to seven alarm codes at a
time. Alarms beyond the first seven alarms are ignored. The alarm
code transfer procedure shown below is used. Addresses used for
alarm code transfer are to be set in Alarm code address, "Acquired
alarm code" signal address, and "Read alarm code" signal address of
[Setting of the entire system (2/4)].
n-th data

Alarm code
(PLC NC)
Read request
(PLC NC)

Read completion
(NC PLC)

- 130 -

(n+1)-th data

B-66254EN/05

7.17.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Detailed Guidance Screen


This screen is displayed when you press the DETAIL button on the
troubleshooting guidance screen.
The left-hand side of this screen displays an image indicating a fault
location. The right-hand side of this screen provides a detailed
description.
If multiple detailed guidance screens are provided for one fault, you
can choose a desired detailed guidance screen with the PREV.
FAULT BUTTON and NEXT FAULT button. The and buttons
are used to scroll the detailed description area.
When you press the RETURN button on this screen, the screen
display returns to the troubleshooting guidance screen. On the flow
diagnostic screen, a similar detailed guidance screen can be created.

Image

Detailed

display area

description area

PREV.
FAULT

NEXT
FAULT

RE
TURN

FAULT
RESET

The maximum allowable size of an image displayed in the image


display area is 300 dots (horizontal) 400 dots (vertical). So, an
image file to be used must be adjusted not to exceed this size
beforehand by using image processing software. An image is
displayed in 256 colors on the CNC screen, so that the displayed
colors of an image may differ from the original colors.

- 131 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)


When you click this line addition
button, cells for 10 lines are added to
the table.

N1

: Screen number. Set the screen number of the troubleshooting


guidance screen from which a detailed guidance screen is
called. If multiple detailed guidance screens are needed for a
fault, the same screen number can be set in multiple lines.
S50 : Set the name of an image file to be displayed on the screen
when a detailed guidance screen is called. Place image files in
a folder, and set only a desired file name (including the
extension) here. Place image files in the PhotoData folder
under the project folder of FANUC PICTURE.
Specify a bit map or JPEG image file of 256-color image.
When 256 colors are used, the size of the operator's panel
screen data file (cex0fpdt.mem) can be reduced.
S255 : Set a character string for a detailed description.

- 132 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.18

FLOW DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN

7.18.1

Screen Configuration
When an NC or machine fault occurs, the flow diagnostic screen
facilitates the determination of the cause and action for correction. By
setting a diagnostic message for an alarm or fault beforehand, fault
diagnosis can be performed conversationally. This screen is linked
with the fault diagnosis function of the CNC. So, when you touch the
Diagnosis Graphics or Diagnosis Monitor button, the waveform
diagnostic screen of the CNC can be displayed. (FANUC PICTURE
of E2.00 and later is needed to use this screen.)
S.HOLD

Diagnosis
Graphic

[TITLE]

Diagnosis
Monitor

[Presumed cause]
[FLOW DIAGNOSE MESSAGE]

FAULT
display
CYCLE
TIME
RUN
STATUS

PREV.
FAULT

BTN01

NEXT

YES

NO

PREV.

DETAIL

STEP

FAULT

BTN02

BTN03

BTN04

BTN05

CONTNUE

READDIAG
FLOW

BTN06

FAULT
RESET

BTN07

FAULT
FLOW

3/3

7.18.1.1 Screen function


When a 16-bit binary alarm code output from the PMC is received, the
message for the same screen number (ALM number) as the received
alarm code among the messages set in the table of [flow diagnostic
screen (1/4)] is displayed in the TITLE field and Presumed cause field
of this screen. An alarm code is received through the PMC address set
in the Alarm code address field in the setting table of [Setting of the
entire system (2/4)]. Up to seven alarm codes can be received at a time,
and an alarm message to be displayed can be selected using the PREV.
FAULT or NEXT FAULT button.
The FLOW DIAGNOSE MESSAGE area of the screen displays
questions (flow diagnostic messages) for identifying the cause of a
fault. When you reply to a displayed question with the YES or NO
button, the next question appears, depending on whether you replied
YES or NO. Thus, a flow diagnosis leading to the identification of the
cause of a fault or proper corrective action can be formed. When you
touch the PREV. STEP button, you can return to the previous question.
Set flow diagnostic messages in the setting table of [Flow diagnostic
screen (2/4)].

- 133 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

For each flow diagnostic message, a detailed description and image


data can be registered ([Flow diagnostic screen (3/4)]). When a flow
diagnostic message with a detailed description and image data
registered is displayed, the DETAIL button on the screen blinks. By
touching the DETAIL button at this time, the detailed description
screen appears, and a registered image and detailed description are
displayed. An image file in the BMP format or JPEG format can be
displayed.
To each flow diagnostic message, a group of manual buttons can be
assigned. One group includes seven buttons. Data such as characters, a
color, and PMC address can be set with these buttons as with ordinary
manual buttons ([Flow diagnostic screen (4/4)]). Up to 50 groups can
be defined. If a button group is assigned to the flow diagnostic
message currently displayed on the screen, the seven buttons at the
bottom of the screen function as the buttons assigned to the message.
This screen can also be used for CNC fault diagnosis. If a CNC alarm
is issued, a flow message prepared beforehand for CNC fault
diagnosis is displayed. So, the cause of the CNC alarm can be
diagnosed as in the case of machine diagnosis. If a displayed CNC
flow diagnostic message includes a prompt for checking the servo
waveform, touch the Diagnosis Graphic or Diagnosis Monitor button
to jump to the CNC waveform diagnostic screen. After checking the
waveform on the CNC waveform diagnostic screen, you can return to
this screen to continue flow diagnosis.
Up to seven alarms, including CNC alarms and machine alarms, can
be displayed on this screen at a time. If eight or more alarms are
issued at a time, all alarms beyond the first seven alarms are ignored.
As a result of CNC alarm diagnosis, you may find that the fault is
caused by machine trouble. Considering such a case, a function for
calling a machine diagnosis flow from a CNC diagnosis flow is
incorporated. For this function, the special message IDs (starting with
M) listed below are reserved. So, if the machine tool builder creates a
diagnosis flow starting with a special message ID, diagnosis
integrating the CNC and machine becomes possible.
If no message is assigned to a special message ID, the end of the
diagnosis flow is assumed when the special message ID is called.
No.

Message
ID

M205

Rigid mode DI
OFF

M407

Excessive
synchronous
axis error

M409

Abnormal load
detected

Alarm name

- 134 -

Presumed cause

The rigid mode DI signal (G061.0) is


not set to 1 when G84 (G74, G88) is
executed.
Two axes to be moved
synchronously lost mechanical
synchronism with each other and
are placed in a twisted state.
A mechanical collision or twist
occurred, resulting in a load torque
higher than a normal operation
value.

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

No.

Message
ID

M410

Excessive stop
error

M411

Excessive move
error

M420

Excessive
torque difference

M421

Excessive
semi-closed loop
error

M436

OVC alarm

Alarm name

Presumed cause

A mechanical collision or twist


occurred, disabling an axis from
reaching a target position.
A mechanical collision or twist
occurred, disabling an axis from
moving.
Two axes to be moved
synchronously lost mechanical
synchronism with each other,
resulting in a large torque
difference.
With a closed-loop machine, a shift
occurred between the motion of the
motor and the motion of the
separate detector for a cause such
as a mechanical twist.
A mechanical collision or twist
occurred, resulting in a large load
and the flow of an excessive
current.

In the future, a message ID to which a jump is made from a CNC


diagnosis flow may be added. So, do no use a message ID starting
with M which may or may not be included in the table above.
In the CNC, servo waveform data is taken into the waveform
diagnosis memory at all times. When a servo alarm is issued, the
storing of new waveform data is stopped, and the waveform data
immediately before the issue of the alarm is preserved in the
waveform diagnosis memory. While the storing of waveform data is
stopped, the upper-right corner of the screen displays the indicator
S.HOLD. This indicator is displayed on any other screens while a
menu button is displayed. This indicator disappears when the storing
of servo waveform data is resumed.
Before restarting operation, clear the data preservation state on the
CNC fault diagnostic screen, and check that the indicator has
disappeared. If operation is restarted without clearing the data
preservation state, servo waveform data is not stored. So, a correct
decision cannot be made when an alarm is issued next.
With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, the indicator S.HOLD
functions as a button for clearing the data preservation state on the
CNC fault diagnosis screen when the Series 18i-LNB is used. Before
restarting operation, press the indicator button S.HOLD to restart the
memorization of the servo waveform.

- 135 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.18.1.2 Method of alarm code transfer


Alarm codes must be transferred from the PLC/PMC to the operator's
panel periodically. If the same alarm code cannot be received even
when the time set in Alarm expiration time of [Setting of the entire
system (2/4)] has elapsed, the alarm is assumed to be reset. The
operator's panel can receive and display up to seven alarm codes at a
time. Alarms beyond the first seven alarms are ignored. The alarm
code transfer procedure shown below is used. Addresses used for
alarm code transfer are to be set in Alarm code address, "Acquired
alarm code" signal address, and "Read alarm code" signal address of
[Setting of the entire system (2/4)].
Alarm code
(PLC NC)

n-th data

(n+1)-th data

Read request
(PLC NC)

Read completion
(NC PLC)

7.18.1.3 Method of flow diagnostic message creation


For the method of flow diagnostic message creation, see Appendix C,
"FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE". For
creation of flow diagnostic messages for multi-language display, see
Appendix C.3, "CREATING FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY".

- 136 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.18.1.4 Detailed description screen


This screen is displayed when you press the DETAIL button on the
flow diagnostic screen. The left-hand side of this screen displays an
image indicating a fault location. The right-hand side of this screen
provides a detailed description.
When you press the RETURN button on this screen, the screen
display returns to the flow diagnostic screen.

Image
display area

RE
TURN

Detailed
description
display area

FAULT
RESET

7.18.1.5 Flow diagnosis continuation function after the power Is


turned on again

With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, a function is added which turns
off the power to the machine during a diagnosis tracing the flow of a
fault, conducts a specified diagnostic investigation, then turns on the
power again to enable the diagnosis to be continued.
To restart a flow diagnosis after the power is turned on again, press
the CONTNUE button on the flow diagnostic screen.

- 137 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.18.1.6 Flow read function


With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, a function for reading the flow
of a fault on the operator's panel is added. The flow of a fault can be
read by pressing the READ-DIAG FLOW button on the flow
diagnostic screen. So, the function can be used, for example, to debug
the machine diagnostic flow.
The flow read screen can be displayed by pressing the READ-DIAG
FLOW button on the flow diagnostic screen.

CNC flow message list screen

Machine flow message list screen

When the flow list screen is displayed, the machine flow list screen is
first displayed. Twenty fault titles are displayed per page. The page
switch button is used to switch between pages. Moreover, by entering
a desired flow number by using the "#FLOW" popup ten-key pad
number display, the user can switch to the desired page directly.
Flow diagnostic data consists of two types of messages: machine flow
messages and CNC flow message. The MACHINE FLOW LIST
button and the CNC FLOW LIST button are available to switch
between the two types of flow lists.
By pressing the SHOW FLOW button, the screen display can be
switched to the flow read screen displaying the diagnostic flow of the
number indicated by the #FLOW button.
- 138 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Flow detail screen

Screen
type

Flow list
screen

Flow
detail
screen

Common

Indications and operation buttons related to the flow read screen


Display item/
Description
button name
Displays an alarm number used to post a machine/CNC fault to the operator's
#FLOW (title)
panel. On the screen display, such an alarm number is referred to as a flow #. A
flow # is specified to display detailed flow diagnostic data.
Displays a fault code assigned to each fault.
FAULT CODE
A code, location, check, and equipment code are displayed in this order.
FAULT TITLE
Displays a fault title assigned to each fault.
Enter a flow # for switching to the desired page of the flow list.
#FLOW (button)
Enter a flow # to be displayed on the flow detail screen.
Switches the screen display to the flow detail screen of flow # displayed by
SHOW FLOW
#FLOW.
(Up/down page switch)
Switches the page of the flow list screen in a selected arrow direction.
Displays the same data as displayed on the flow diagnostic screen. For the flow
Flow data display field,
of a fault that occurs on each axis, however, "?" is indicated as an axis name.
YES, NO, PREV.
The buttons also operate in the same way as on the flow diagnostic screen.
STEP, DETAIL
#FLOW
Enter a flow # to display the corresponding flow detail screen.
SHOW FLOW
This button has no effect, because the flow detail screen is already displayed.
Switches the screen display to the flow detail screen of the flow # immediately
(Up/down page switch)
preceding or following the flow # of the current flow detail screen.
Ends the flow read screen and returns the screen display to the flow diagnostic
READING END
screen.
MACHINE FLOW LIST
Switches the screen display to the machine flow message list screen.
CNC FLOW LIST
Switches the screen display to the CNC flow message list screen.

- 139 -

B-66254EN/05

7.18.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Fault Title and Presumed Cause Setting - Setting Table (1/4)


When you click this line addition button, cells
for the number of lines selected in the left-hand
combo box are added to the table.

S6_1

: Set a character string for indicating a path where an alarm is


issued when 2-path control is used. If an alarm is issued on
path 1 when 2-path control is used, the name set in this item
is added to the lower digits of a suffix/alarm No.
S6_2 : Set a character string for indicating a path where an alarm is
issued when 2-path control is used. If an alarm is issued on
path 2 when 2-path control is used, the name set in this item
is added to the lower digits of a suffix/alarm No.
S17
: Specify the number of the same fault reset button as used on
other screens. When the same button as the fault reset button
(named BTN07) on the fault display screen (named IJYOU)
is to be created on the troubleshooting guidance screen, for
example, enter IJYOU BTN07.
S10
: Character string to be displayed at the start of line 1 of the
presumed cause field of the flow diagnostic screen. After
this character string, a character string for line 1 of the
presumed cause field is displayed. The total length of a
character string set in this item and a character string for the
presumed cause field must not exceed 32 half-size characters
or 16 full-size characters.
N1
: Set a flow diagnostic screen number. When an alarm code is
sent from the PMC through an address set in [Setting of the
entire system (2/4)], the operator's panel displays the data of
the same screen number as the received alarm code on the
flow diagnostic screen. (0 to 65535)
S3
: Fault code (3 half-size characters max.)
S2
: Part code (1 half-size character max.)
S1
: Maintenance level code (1 half-size character max.)
S16
: Suffix/alarm No.(NC error code) (16 half-size characters
max.)
S32_1 : Character string to be displayed in the title field of the flow
diagnostic screen (32 half-size characters or 16 full-size
characters max.)

- 140 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

S32_2 : Character string to be displayed in lines 1, 2 and 3 of the


presumed cause field of the flow diagnostic screen (32
half-size characters or 16 full-size characters max.)
S6_3 : Set the message ID of the first flow message for the
corresponding diagnosis flow. (6 half-size characters max.)
Z2
: This field is not used.

NOTE
When you click the line addition button, the table
can be expanded by the number of lines selected
in the combo box to the left of the button.

- 141 -

B-66254EN/05

7.18.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Flow Diagnostic Message Setting - Setting Table (2/4)

S6

: Message ID and next message ID


A message ID is an ID assigned to a flow diagnostic message.
A character string not longer than 6 half-size characters can be
used.
As a next message ID, specify the ID of a flow diagnostic
screen to be displayed next when you reply YES or NO to a
flow diagnostic message.
Set -1 when there is no jump destination because of the last
flow stage.
Do not use message IDs starting with M. Those message IDs
that start with M are reserved message IDs to be referenced
from CNC alarm diagnosis flows.
S128 : Enter a flow diagnostic message. When the first 32 characters
of a character string entered are displayed, the character string
is automatically wrapped to the next line unless you
intentionally perform a new line operation. For a new line
operation, enter \n or enter ALT + Enter. (128 half-size
characters or 64 full-size characters max.)
N1 : While the flow diagnostic message of a line is displayed on
the screen, the button group specified in the line is assigned to
the manual buttons at the bottom of the screen. Specify a
number in the GP column of the manual button setting table of
[Flow diagnostic screen (4/4)]. (Number from 1 to 50)
S255 : Note. Use this column for memorandums. (255 half-size
characters max.)
S10 : Automatic diagnosis function and Argument are not used.

NOTE
When you click the line addition button, the table
can be expanded by the number of lines selected
in the combo box to the left of the button.

- 142 -

B-66254EN/05

7.18.4

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Image File Name and Detail Message Setting - Setting Table


(3/4)

S6: Message ID. Set the same message ID as for a flow diagnostic
message (setting table 2/4) that calls a detailed description
screen.
S50: Set the name of an image file to be displayed when a detailed
description screen is called. Place image files in the PhotoData
folder under the project folder of FANUC PICTURE, and set
only a desired file name (including the extension) here. An image
file in the BMP (bit map) format or JPEG format only can be
displayed on the screen. Specify a bit map or JPEG image file of
256-color image. When 256 colors are used, the size of the
operator's panel flow diagnostic screen data file (cex2mcal.mem)
can be reduced.

NOTE
The maximum allowable size of an image
displayed in the image display area is 300 dots
(horizontal) x 400 dots (vertical). So, an image file
to be used must be adjusted not to exceed this size
beforehand by using image processing software.
An image is displayed in 256 colors on the NC
screen, so that the displayed colors of an image
may differ from the original colors.
S255: Set a character string for a detailed description.

- 143 -

B-66254EN/05

7.18.5

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Button Area Setting - Setting Table (4/4)


Using the setting table (4/4), define the functions of the operation
buttons displayed at the bottom of the screen. Up to 50 groups, each
consisting of 7 buttons, can be defined. Specify a group number (GP)
for each flow diagnostic message, and relate it with a desired manual
button group. When a flow diagnostic message is displayed on the
screen, the operation button group related to the message is displayed
at the bottom of the screen.

Up to 50 groups, each consisting of 7 manual buttons, can be set. The


method of setting is the same as for the fault display screen.

- 144 -

B-66254EN/05

7.19

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

LOAD TORQUE MONITOR SCREEN


For the types and operation of the load torque monitor screen, refer to
"FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist/Cycle Monitor and Load Torque
Monitor Screen Operator's Manual (B-66274EN)".
The load torque monitor screen is available with FPAssist Version 4.05
and later.
A capability for setting four spindles per path is available with FPAssist
Version 5.20 and later.
A function for specifying a load torque measurement sequence number
for each main program (up to four main programs), and a function for
posting the type of error handling taken when a load torque excess
alarm is generated are available with FPAssist Version 5.30 and later.

7.19.1

Load Torque Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1)


[Load torque screen 1/1]
Screen name:

CHECK
OK
Screens for the 2nd PATH.
Set if you create 2nd PATH screens.(0: No 2nd PATH screens, 1:Create 2nd PATH screens)
Abreviated name of spindles and axes. (within 4 alpha-numeric characters)
Setting items
Existence and name of the 1st spindle (0: no existence)
Existence and name of the 2nd spindle
Existence and name of the 1st axis
Existence and name of the 2nd axis
Existence and name of the 3rd axis
Existence and name of the 4th axis
Existence and name of the 5th axis
Existence and name of the 6th axis
Existence and name of the 7th axis
Existence and name of the 8th axis

Spindle assignment for each PATH.


Spindle number
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

Spindles used for the


machining of PATH 1

Spindles used for the


machining of PATH 2

I/O addresses to store Load Torque data.


Setting items
Store Load Torque data in I/O area (1) or not (0).
Top address of data storage I/O area.(D or R area)
Data size selection (0: 432 byte, 1: 696 byte)

Set of action type at load torque failure


Button name
Output signal
Type1
S6
A1
S6
Type2
S6
A1
S6
Type3
S6
A1
S6
Type4
S6
A1
S6

- 145 -

PATH 1
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4

N1

PATH 2
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4

Spindles controlled
Spindles controlled
by PATH 1 controller
by PATH 2 controller
1st spindle 2nd spindle 1st spindle 2nd spindle
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2

N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2

N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2

N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2

PATH 1
N3
A2
N4

PATH 2
N3
A2
N4

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

N1

S4

N2

N3

A2
N4
S6

A1

: Set 1 when a two-path system is used and the load torque on the
axes of path 2 is monitored. Set 0 when a single-path system is
used or when a two-path system is used but the load torque on
the axes of path 2 is not monitored.
: Set whether to use a spindle or servo axis, and set an axis name
for each path. A name set here is used on the load torque
display screen. Set 0 for an axis not used. For an axis to be used,
set an axis name not longer than 4 half-size characters or 2
full-size characters. With the Series 18i-LNA, up to six axes
can be set for path 1, and up to four axes can be set for path 2.
: This setting table sets the correspondence between spindles 1, 2,
3, and 4 set on the load monitor data setting screen for each
path and the actual spindles. Set 1 for each axis to be actually
used. If a spindle is shared, for example, on a two-path lathe,
this setting table enables the load torque data of the same
spindle to be displayed on both paths.
: Measured load torque data can be transferred to the D or R area
of the PMC. When a transfer machine is used, for example, this
function is used to transfer the data of each sub-station to the
master station via FL-NET. Set 1 to use this function. Set 0 not
to use this function.
: Specify to which of the D and R areas of the PMC load torque
data is to be transferred.
: Select a load torque data transfer size.
0: 432 bytes
1: 696 bytes
: These select buttons are used to select an action to be taken
when a load torque excess alarm is issued during load torque
measurement. Four types of action can be set. Specify a
character string indicating an action with up to two lines each
consisting of up to six half-size characters. You need not
specify all four types. By default, type 1 is selected.
When a load torque excess alarm is issued, a PMC ladder
should check the status of the signals set for these buttons to
determine the selected type, and appropriate action should be
taken.
Generally, the following action types are used:
<1> Warning: A warning lamp is lit.
<2> Cycle stop: Operation stops at the end of a cycle.
<3> Return:
A return program is executed when an
excess alarm is issued.
<4> SBK stop: Single block stop
: Set a signal address to be assigned to an action type select
button used when an excess alarm is issued.

- 146 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

7.20

QUALITY CHECK SCREEN

7.20.1

Screen Configuration
The quality check screen is used to manage quality checking at tool
exchange time. The screen consists of a quality check direction screen
for indicating the numbers of tools to be checked and check directions,
and a quality check parameter screen for setting a machining point (flag
point/cycle point) where each tool is to be checked for quality.
The quality check screen is available with FPAssist Version 5.10 and
later, and can be incorporated when the FANUC PMC is used.
To create a quality check screen, the following conditions must be
satisfied:
<1> The tool exchange counter 1 screen or the tool exchange counter 2
screen is required.
<2> The FANUC PMC is required.

Quality check direction screen

Quality check parameter screen

- 147 -

B-66254EN/05

Screen
type

Quality
check
direction
screen

Quality
check
parameter
screen

Common

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)


Indications and operation buttons related to the quality check screen
Display item/
Description
button name
The check button of a tool number to be checked for quality is turned on. After
(DIRECTION) CHECK
checking the machining state of a tool, press the button for the checked tool to
notify the PMC that the checking is completed.
ALL CHECK
Notifies the PMC of the completion of the checking of multiple tools at a time.
QUALITY PARAM
Switches the screen display to the quality check parameter screen.
Turn ON the button for a new tool that is to be checked for quality at a flag point.
(FLAG) ON/OFF
Pressing each button switches the state between ON and OFF alternatively.
Turn ON the button for a new tool that is to be checked for quality at a cycle
(CYCLE) ON/OFF
point. Pressing each button switches the state between ON and OFF
alternatively.
ALL OFF
Turns OFF the flag/cycle setting buttons for all tools.
Turns ON the flag setting buttons for all tools.
ALL ON (FLAG)
This operation turns OFF all buttons on the cycle side.
Turns ON the cycle setting buttons for all tools.
ALL ON (CYCLE)
This operation turns OFF all buttons on the flag side.
DIRECT. QUALITY
Switches the screen display to the quality check direction screen.
CHECK
Displayed when the quality check parameter screen operation interlock signal is
EQUIPMENT
OPERATING/SETTING on. During interlock operation, the ON/OFF settings of the flag/cycle buttons
cannot be changed.
DISABLED
Displays, as titles, tool numbers from T01 up to T64 managed with the tool
exchange counter screen. The displayed tool numbers correspond to the
sequential numbers (numbers in the No. item) registered on the tool exchange
TOOL (title)
counter screen. The tool exchange counter screen can manage up to 48 tools,
so the 49th tool and up can be specified for management by the PMC.
When the quality check direction screen or the quality check parameter screen
(Page switch)
has a second page, this button switches the screen display between the pages.

- 148 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.20.2

Quality Check PMC Ladder and Timing Chart


This section describes operation from the operator's panel and
processing on a PMC ladder.
Flag point or cycle point stop information for each tool is preserved in
the D area of the nonvolatile PMC memory at all times.
<1> The operator's panel posts a tool number whose exchange counter
has changed from 0 to 1 in tool exchange counter processing.
(New tool notification signal)
<2> Upon reception of the new tool notification signal, the PMC
checks the nonvolatile memory to see if a flag point stop or cycle
point stop is set for the new tool. If a stop point is set, machining
stop processing is performed at a proper position.
<3> When the PMC confirms the stop of machining, the check
direction button for the new tool is turned on in order to request
the operator to make a quality check, then the quality check
direction switch signal is turned on.
<4> When the check direction button is turned on, the operator's panel
turns off the new tool notification signal.
<5> In response to the check direction, the operator is to check the
machined workpiece for quality and press the check button for the
tool.
<6> Upon reception of the output from the check button, the PMC
turns off the button lamp signal. Moreover, whether other tools
have been checked is checked. When all checks have been made,
machining is restarted.

Quality check function/timing chart with the PMC


The shaded portions represent processing on the PMC side.
Count-up signal T1
Tool counter value T1

(01)

(12)

New tool notification T1


Machining stop command (flag/cycle)
Machining stop confirmation
Quality check button T1 ON
Quality check direction screen switch request
Pressing of quality check button T1
Check completion confirmation
Restart of machining

- 149 -

B-66254EN/05

7.20.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Quality Check Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1)


[Quality check screen 1/1]
Screen name:
6
CHECK -1
0
OK
Number tool(1-64)
Quality check button

Lump signal
Output signa
Parameter quality button Output flag
Output cycle
New tool notification signal
Interlock signal to set

N1

A1_1

A1_2

A1_3

A1_4

N1

Num.page

Top address Bottom address


A1_1
A1_2
A1_3
A1_4
A1_5
A1_6

: Specify the number of tools to be checked for quality. A


number from 1 to 64 can be specified. The tool exchange
counter 2 screen can manage up to 48 tools.
When a number is entered here, the number of pages is
automatically displayed.
One page can display up to 32 tools. So, up to two pages are
created.
: Specify a start signal address to be assigned to check button
lamp signals on the quality check direction screen. Starting
from the bit 0 position of a specified signal address, bits as
many as the number of tools are used in ascending order from
T01 to T02 and so on.
When a start address is entered, the end address of the byte(s)
used is automatically indicated. The signals in this range must
not be assigned to any other purposes.
: Specify a start signal address to be assigned to the output
signals for check buttons on the quality check direction screen.
Starting from the bit 0 position of a specified signal address,
bits as many as the number of tools are used in ascending order
from T01 to T02 and so on.
When a start address is entered, the end address of the byte(s)
used is automatically indicated. The signals in this range must
not be assigned to any other purposes.
: Specify a start signal address to be assigned to the output
signals for flag point buttons on the quality check parameter
screen. Starting from the bit 0 position of a specified signal
address, bits as many as the number of tools are used in
ascending order from T01 to T02 and so on.
Specify an address in the D area of the nonvolatile PMC signal
area. When a start address is entered, the end address of the
byte(s) used is automatically indicated. The signals in this
range must not be assigned to any other purposes.
: Specify a start signal address to be assigned to the output
signals for cycle point buttons on the quality check parameter
screen. Starting from the bit 0 position of a specified signal
address, bits as many as the number of tools are used in
ascending order from T01 to T02 and so on.
- 150 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Specify an address in the D area of the nonvolatile PMC signal


area. When a start address is entered, the end address of the
byte(s) used is automatically indicated. The signals in this
range must not be assigned to any other purposes.
A1_5 : Specify a start signal address to be assigned to the output signal
for the new tool notification signal (for posting a tool whose
tool change counter has changed from 0 to 1). Starting from the
bit 0 position of a specified signal address, bits as many as the
number of tools are used in ascending order from T01 to T02
and so on. In general, the number of tools on the tool exchange
counter screen matches the number of tools on the quality
check screen. However, up to the number of tools on the quality
check screen is posted.
When a start address is entered, the end address of the byte(s)
used is automatically indicated. The signals in this range must
not be assigned to any other purposes.
A1_6 : Set an interlock signal to be referenced by a button on the
quality check parameter screen.

- 151 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.21

CYCLE MONITOR SCREEN


The cycle monitor screen is available with FPAssist Version 5.10 and
later, and can be incorporated when the Series 18i-LNB is used.
For the types and operation of the cycle monitor screen, refer to
"FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist/Cycle Monitor and Load Torque
Monitor Screen Operator's Manual (B-66274EN)".
If a cycle monitor screen that can be created when the Series 18i-LNB
is used is incorporated, a cycle time measurement screen and cycle time
setting screen cannot be created. Only the former screen or the latter
screens can be incorporated at a time.

7.21.1

Cycle Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1)


Conventionally, in the cycle time display field of the number display
field on each operation screen, a cycle time value obtained by
measurement using the cycle time measurement screen is displayed.
If the cycle monitor screen is incorporated, the cycle time measurement
screen cannot be incorporated. So, the cycle monitor screen provides
means for cycle time measurement of each operation screen in order to
substitute for the cycle time measurement screen.
As with the cycle time measurement screen, set a proper signal in the
item of Motion1 below.

[Cycle Monitor screen]


14 Screen name:
CHECK -1
0
OK
Machine No.
S10

No

Pg

Item

Name

Motion1

S20

S10

PMC address
Start
Stop
A1_1
A1_2

Measurement type.
Decimal Mode
point
N1
N2

N3

: Set a machine number of Toyota Motor.


This information is used for identification in a data file name
created by the cycle monitor.
S20 : Need not be set.
A1_1 : Specify an entire cycle time measurement start signal.
A1_2 : Specify an entire cycle time measurement stop signal.
N1 : Set 0 or 1.
N2 : Set 1 to make an entire cycle time measurement. Set 0 if such a
measurement is unnecessary.
N3 : Select a measurement type.
0: Edge type
1: Level type

- 152 -

B-66254EN/05

7.22

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

SAFETY IO STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN


Soft safety circuit diagnosis screens are used to diagnose the dual check
safety function of the Series 18i-LNB and are made up of the following
three types of screen:
<1> Safety I/O status display screen indicating the status of the I/O
signals of the safety I/O unit
<2> Built-in safety logic status screen indicating the status of the
built-in safety circuit
<3> TR safety I/O status screen indicating the status of the safety
signals transferred between stations by the FL-NET safety
function
When the dual check safety function is to be used, be sure to include
the <1> safety I/O status display screen and <2> built-in safety logic
status screen. The <3> TR safety I/O status screen is included only
when the FL-NET safety function is used.

7.22.1

Screen Configuration
The safety I/O status display screen shows the input/output status of the
safety I/O unit used by the dual check safety function. A screen for a
single-path system and a screen for a two-path system are provided.
The NAME column indications can be customized according to the
application of each input or output, so the status of safety-related
signals can be checked at a glance. In the input and output columns, the
status of the input/output signals of each connector of the safety I/O
unit is indicated. (OFF: Black, ON: Green) The A column shows the
status of the signals on the I/O Link, and the B column shows the status
of the signals on the serial link (FSSB).
Safety I/O status display screen for a single-path system

- 153 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Safety I/O status display screen for a two-path system

The addresses of the signals displayed in the lamp display area of the
screen are as follows:

CNA9

Input
Path1
A1
B1
N333#4
X01#4
N334#0
X02#0
N334#6
X02#6
N332#1
X00#1
N334#1
X02#1
N334#7
X02#7
N332#2
X00#2
N334#2
X02#2
N334#3
X02#3
N334#4
X02#4
X334#5
X02#5

CNA10

N332#3

Connector

CNA1
CNA2
CNA3
CNA4
CNA5
CNA6
CNA7
CNA8

X00#3

Path2
B2
X09#4

Output

Connector

M336#0

X08#1

M337#0

X08#2

M337#1
Y112#4

CNB1
CNB2
CNB3
CNB4
CNB5
CNB6
Path1
CNB7
Path2
CNB8

Y112#5

CNB9

X08#3

Input
A
N335#4
N335#5
N335#6
N335#0
N335#1
N335#2
N333#6
N343#6
N335#3

B
X03#4
X03#5
X03#6
X03#0
X03#1
X03#2
X01#6
X09#6
X03#3

Output
A
N341#1
N341#2
N341#3

B
Y01#1
Y01#2
Y01#3

M336#1
M347#1
N341#0

Y00#1
Y06#1
Y01#0
Y00#3

Y113#2

M337#2

If a mismatch is detected with a dual signal, the name field of the signal
blinks in red. Once a signal mismatch occurs, the red blinking status in
the name field is maintained. Even if the signal status changes to a
match, the original blue indication is not resumed. However, the status
indication lamp of the signal does not preserve the status present when
a mismatch is detected, but displays the current status at all times.
The safety IO status display screen is available with FPAssist Version
5.10 (FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist E5.00) and later and can be
incorporated when the Series 18i-LNB is used.

- 154 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

CAUTION
When a mismatch occurs with a dual signal, the
following signal is set to 1:
Mismatch notification signal
M425.7
By using this signal, make an automatic screen call
setting on the machine operator's panel so that the
safety IO status display screen can be called
automatically when a mismatch occurs.

- 155 -

B-66254EN/05

7.22.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Built-in Safety Logic Status Screen


The built-in safety logic status screen shows the status of the I/Os of the
built-in safety circuit and emergency stop input signals monitored by
the built-in safety circuit.
(For the built-in safety circuit, refer to "Series 18i-LNB Connection
Manual (Hardware)" B-63933EN.)
From this screen, you can understand the status of the built-in safety
circuit.
The addresses of the signals displayed in the lamp display area of the
screen are shown on the next page. Signal names can be changed with
FPAssist.
When you touch a sky-blue signal name field, you can call a ladder
diagram that uses the signal.
Showing the status of the CNC emergency stop signal inputs, emregency stop
signals output from the built-in safety circuit to CNC, MC (MCC) drive outputs
and off check siganls for servo power supply control. (For each of paths 1
and 2)

Showing the status of I/O of the


operation preparation circuit and
emergency stop and off check signals
monitored by the circuit internally

Showing the status of I/Os of power


supply circuit 1 and off check signals
monitored by the circuit internally

Showing the status of I/Os of power


supply circuit 2 and off check signals
monitored by the circuit internally

Showing the status of emergency stop signals


monitored by the built-in safety circuit

The built-in safety logic status screen, available with FPAssist Version
5.50 (FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist E5.06) and later, can be included
when the Series 18i-LNB is used.

- 156 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Addresses of the signals displayed in the lamp display area in the


left half of the screen

Operation
preparation
circuit

Power
supply circuit

Power
supply circuit

Input
A
B
N352#0 G01#0
N352#1 G01#1
N352#2 G01#2
N352#3 G01#3

MASTER ON BTN
MASTER ON COND.
EMG STOP COND.
OFF CHECK
MASTER ON
POWER DOWN COND.
OFF CHECK
POWER SUPPLY

N353#2
N353#3

POWER DOWN COND.


OFF CHECK
POWER SUPPLY

N353#6
N353#7

G02#2
G02#3
G02#6
G02#7

Internal
A
B

M348#7
N335#4

N335#5

N335#6

Output
A

X117#0

X117#1

X117#2

X117#3

X117#4

X117#5

F01#7
X03#4

X03#5

X03#6

Addresses of the signals displayed in the lamp display area in the


left half of the screen
Input
A
N342#0

B
G00#0

Internal
A
B

Path 1
Servo power
control

EMG STOP FOR CNC


OFF CHECK
SERVO PWR SUPPLY

Path 1
Servo power
control

OFF CHECK
SERVO PWR SUPPLY

N343#6

Emergency
stop signal
status

EMG STOP BTN1


EMG STOP BTN2
EMG STOP BTN3
PMC RUN
SAFETY ALARM
FL-NET EMG STOP

N334#2
N334#6
N334#7
R9015#1
M337#7
M348#0

N333#6

- 157 -

Output
A
G08#4

B
F00#0

X116#3

X117#6

X100#3

X101#6

X01#6
X09#6

X02#2
X02#6
X02#7
F00#6
F00#7
F01#0

B-66254EN/05

7.22.3

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

TR SAFETY I/O STATUS DISPLAY


The TR safety I/O status screen shows the status of the FL-net safety
function and the status of safety-related signals shared among the
stations of a transfer machine using the FL-net safety function. This
screen is included in the operator's panel only when the FL-net safety
function is used. (For the FL-net safety function, refer to "Series
18i-LNB Connection Manual (Hardware)" B-63933EN.)
A screen as shown below can be created simply by setting in FPAssist
the placement of stations (nodes) and the names of safety signals used
for communication through FL-net. Signal addresses are assigned
automatically, so you need not set them.
FL-NET STATE SIGNL fields are lit when FL-net communication is
performed normally. If a node is separated from FL-net for a reason
such as a communication error, the corresponding field is off.
FL-NET SAFETY NODE fields indicate whether to participate in the
FL-net safety function. The field indication follows the settings of the
destination node bit parameters (Nos. 13862 to 13865, 13876 to 13879)
of the FL-net safety function. The fields for nodes that participate in the
FL-net safety function are lit, and the fields for those that do not
participate are off.
SAFETY ALARM SIGNL fields are lit red when the FL-net safety
function detects an abnormality.
Signal fields (0 to 6) show the status of the signals of each node.

- 158 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.22.4

Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/2)

[Safety I/O Status screen ]


2 Screen name:
CHECK 1
0
NEED
CNC system(Single path or 1CPU2path=0, 2CPU2path=1)
Connector
No.
CNA1
CNA2
CNA3
CNA4
CNA5
CNA6
CNA7
CNA8
CNA8-1
CNA8-2
CNA8-3
CNA9
CNA10

Mode

N2

Title

N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1

Equipment Code
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1

N1
N1
N1
N1
N1

S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1

Connector
No.
CNB1
CNB2
CNB3
CNB4
CNB5
CNB6
CNB7
CNB8
CNB9-1
CNB9-2

Signal Name
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2

Mode
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1

Title
Equipment Code
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1
S14_1

Signal Name
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2
S14_2

N2

: Set 0 when the CNC system is a single-path system or a


single-CPU, two-path system. Set 1 when the CNC system is
a two-CPU, two-path system.
N1
: Set a mode. Set 1 for a connector used with the safety I/O unit.
Set 0 for a connector not used with the safety I/O unit.
S14_1 : Set the equipment code of the signal connected to a connector,
by using an alphanumeric character string not longer than 14
half-size characters. For the CNA8-1, CNA8-2, and CNA8-3,
use an alphanumeric character string not longer than 13
half-size characters.
S14_2 : Set the name of the signal connected to a connector, by using
an alphanumeric character string not longer than 14 half-size
characters. The following character strings are set initially.
For the CNA8, use an alphanumeric character string not
longer than 10 half-size characters.
Initially set character strings
Connector

No.

CNA1
CNA2
CNA3
CNA4
CNA5
CNA6
CNA7
CNA8
CNA8-1
CNA8-2
CNA8-3
CNA9
CNA10

Title
Signal Name
DOOR LOCK 1
LIGHT CURTAIN1
EMG STOP BTN 2
DOOR LOCK 2
LIGHT CURTAIN2
EMG STOP BTN 3
DOOR LOCK 3
OP. PANEL
EMG STOP BTN 1
MASTER ON BTN1
OP. POWER ON
MASTER ON BTN2
DOOR LOCK 4

- 159 -

Connector
No.
CNB1
CNB2
CNB3
CNB4
CNB5
CNB6
CNB7
CNB8
CNB9-1
CNB9-2

Title
Signal Name
POWER SUPPLY1
POWER SUPPLY2
POWER SUPPLY3
DOOR SWITCH1
DOOR SWITCH2
DOOR SWITCH3
SV. PWR SUPPLY
MPG ENABLE
SERVO BRAKE1
SERVO BRAKE2

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

[Built-in safety logic status screen setting Setting table 1/2]


Setting table
Operation
preparation
circuit

No.

Power supply
circuit 2

Servo power supply


(path 2)
Emergency stop
signals

Title

Power supply
circuit 1

Servo power supply


(path 1)

Device Code
S16_1

4
5

S16_1
S16_1
S16_1
S16_1
S16_1

Setting table

Signal Name
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2
S16_2

S16_1 :

Mode

No.

Device Code
M1CR1M

2
3
4

N3

M1CR2M
M1CR12M
1SSW1

5 M1SSW2
EMG STOP SIGNALS
6

N4

Title

Signal Name
MASTER ON BTN
MASTER ON COND.
EMG STOP COND.
OFF CHECK
MASTER ON
POWER DOWN COND.
OFF CHECK
POWER SUPPLY
POWER DOWN COND.
OFF CHECK
POWER SUPPLY
EMG STOP FOR CNC
OFF CHECK
SERVO PWR SUPPLY
OFF CHECK
SERVO PWR SUPPLY
EMG STOP BTN1
EMG STOP BTN2
EMG STOP BTN3
PMC RUN
SAFETY ALARM
FL-NET EMG STOP

Mode

0
0

Set the equipment code of a magnetic contactor for operation


preparation, power supply, or servo power supply, by using a
character string not longer than 16 half-size characters.
S16_2 : Set the name of a signal related to operation preparation,
power supply, or servo power supply, by using a character
string not longer than 16 half-size characters.
The signal names indicated in the setting example shown in
the right table above are initially set but can be changed
freely.
N3
: For a two-path system with two CPUs, set 1. If 0 is set, item 5
will not appear on the screen.
N4
: When using the FL-net safety function, set 1. If 0 is set, the
FL-net emergency stop signal status will not appear on the
screen.

- 160 -

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05

7.22.5

Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting Setting Table (2/2)


When a transfer machine uses the FL-net safety function, a screen for
displaying the status of safety signals of all nodes is created by making
appropriate settings on this page.

[TR Safety I/O Status screen 2/2]


Screen name: SAFETY
1
NEED
Set up TR Safety I/O Status screen (1:Yes 0:No)
My node number
S1_1
Side L/R
S1_2

N6

N5

N7
N8
N7

Page1
N7 N7
N8 N8
N7 N7

N7
N8
N7

Page2
N7 N7
N8 N8
N7 N7

Node No.
ST No.
Node No.

N7
N8
N7

Page3
N7 N7
N8 N8
N7 N7

N7
N8
N7

N7
N8
N7

N7
N8
N7

Node No.
ST No.
Node No.

N7
N8
N7

Page4
N7 N7
N8 N8
N7 N7

N7
N8
N7

N7
N8
N7

N7
N8
N7

Node No.
ST No.
Node No.
Node No.
ST No.
Node No.

Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

N7
N8
N7
N7
N8
N7

N7
N8
N7
N7
N8
N7

N7
N8
N7
N7
N8
N7

N7
N8
N7
N7
N8
N7
N7
N8
N7

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

N7
N8
N7
N7
N8
N7
N7
N8
N7

Signal Name
S18
S18
S18
S18
S18
S18
S18

Node No.
ST No. + L/R
FL-net state signal
FL-net safety node
FL-net safety data signal addres

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Node No.
ST No. + L/R
FL-net state signal
FL-net safety node

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Node No.
ST No. + L/R
FL-net state signal
FL-net safety node

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Node No.
ST No. + L/R
FL-net state signal
FL-net safety node

FL-net safety data signal addres

FL-net safety data signal addres

FL-net safety data signal addres

1
A
B
A
B

A1
M470.1
M504.1
M440
M474

A
B
A
B

N0346.0
M471.1
M505.1
M448
M482

A
B
A
B

N0347.0
M472.1
M506.1
M456
M490

A
B
A
B

N0348.0
M473.1
M507.1
M464
M498

17

25

2
N0345.1
M470.2
M504.2
M441
M475
10
N0346.1
M471.2
M505.2
M449
M483
18
N0347.1
M472.2
M506.2
M457
M491
26
N0348.1
M473.2
M507.2
M465
M499

3
N0345.2
M470.3
M504.3
M442
M476
11
N0346.2
M471.3
M505.3
M450
M484
19
N0347.2
M472.3
M506.3
M458
M492
27
N0348.2
M473.3
M507.3
M466
M500

4
N0345.3
M470.4
M504.4
M443
M477
12
N0346.3
M471.4
M505.4
M451
M485
20
N0347.3
M472.4
M506.4
M459
M493
28
N0348.3
M473.4
M507.4
M467
M501

5
N0345.4
M470.5
M504.5
M444
M478
13
N0346.4
M471.5
M505.5
M452
M486
21
N0347.4
M472.5
M506.5
M460
M494
29
N0348.4
M473.5
M507.5
M468
M502

6
N0345.5
M470.6
M504.6
M445
M479
14
N0346.5
M471.6
M505.6
M453
M487
22
N0347.5
M472.6
M506.6
M461
M495

7
N0345.6
M470.7
M504.7
M446
M480
15
N0346.6
M471.7
M505.7
M454
M488
23
N0347.6
M472.7
M506.7
M462
M496

30
N0348.5
M473.6
M507.6
M469
M503

[TR Safety I/O Status screen Setting table 2/2]


N5
N6

S1_1
S1_2

: When creating the TR safety I/O status screen, set 1. If 0 is set,


the TR safety I/O status screen is not created.
: Local node number. Set the number of a node (FL-net node)
in which the screen to be created is installed. On the screen,
the node corresponding to the node number set here is
indicated in blue.
: LR specification. Use one half-size character. Normally, set L
or R. The character set here appears at the beginning of the
nodes displayed in the upper half of the screen.
: LR specification. Use one half-size character. Normally, set L
or R. The character set here appears at the beginning of the
nodes displayed in the lower half of the screen.
S1_1

N6
S1_2

- 161 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

N7

N8

S18

: Node number. Set the node numbers of FL-net according to


the placement of the stations of the transfer machine. Nodes
with node numbers 1 to 30 can use the FL-net safety function.
A number beyond this range cannot be set.
: Station number. Set a station number with a one- or two-digit
number according to the placement of the stations of the
transfer machine.
The layout of the screen is created according to the settings in
N7 and N8.
: Signal name. When the FL-net safety function is used, seven
safety bit signals can be transmitted from each node. Set the
name of an assigned signal, by using up to 18 half-size
characters. This name will appear on the screen.
The signal names listed below are initially set, and they can
be changed according to the actual application. Bit 0, however,
is always assigned to the emergency stop signal. This bit
cannot be assigned to another signal.

Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

Signal name

A1

Signal Name
EMG STOP SIGNAL
PWR SUPPLY COND.1
PWR SUPPLY COND.2

: Signal address for displaying the FL-net communication


status.
To display FL-net node list information in the FL-NET
STATE SIGNL column on this screen, set the bit address at
which information on node 1 is stored, based on the R address
set in an FL-net parameter, participating node information
address (Pa21).
For example, if R4000 is set in FL-net parameter Pa21, set
R4000.1 here.
FL-NET STATE SIGNL on the TR safety I/O status screen
shows information corresponding to the nodes for which a
value is set as the node number in N7 among the participating
node list information written in the area starting at the address
set here.
Nodes participating in the FL-net network are indicated in
green, and nodes separated from the network are indicated in
black.

- 162 -

B-66254EN/05

7.23

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREEN


The periodic maintenance screen is used to count the lives of
consumables to be replaced periodically and thus manage the time of
replacement and arrival of the lives of those consumables. The lives of
up to ten items can be counted. When the life of an item is to be used
up very soon or is just used up, a signal is sent to the PMC for
notification.
The periodic maintenance screen is available with FPAssist Version
5.30 and later and can be incorporated when the Series 18i-LNB is
used.

7.23.1

Screen Configuration

Description of operation
(1) Before performing setting operations on the screen, turn off the
periodic maintenance operation interlock signal.
(2) To incorporate settings made with FPAssist as initial values, select
the desired setting items by using the selection buttons PARTS
NAME, LIFE, and COUNT TYPE on the title line of the screen.
(Multiple items can be selected.). Then, press the SETTING
INITIAL VALUE button. The FPAssist settings of the selected
items are registered in the CNC at a time.
(3) For each maintenance item, set LIFE (in hours) and COUNT
TYPE. The number indication field is a popup ten-key pad. So,
touch desired numbers for setting.
(4) To select an item for which counting down from its life is to be
started, touch the number in the NO. column then press the
CHANGE PART button. This operation presets the life of the
selected item in REMAINING LIFE and starts count-down
operation. Only one item selection button can be selected at a time.
To start counting down for multiple items, repeat the operation
above.
- 163 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

(5) Even during count-down operation for an item, the values of


REMAINING LIFE and LIFE can be changed. Use the
modification method described in (2) above.
RESET LIFE WARNING button
At power-up time or during count-down operation, the operator's panel
outputs a life warning signal when any of the items for which
count-down operation is being performed has reached a warning level
(state where its remaining life has decreased to the ratio set with CNC
parameter No. 8911 or below) or has used up its life.
Use this button to stop the output of this signal. However, when an
additional item has reached its warning level or life, the life warning
signal is out again. This operation is irrelevant to the periodic
maintenance operation interlock signal.

CAUTION
This reset button does not turn off the output signal
F93.0 output by the CNC.
Display item
NO. 1-10

STATUS

PARTS NAME

REMAINING LIFE

LIFE

COUNT TYPE

CHANGE PART
RESET LIFE
WARNING
SETTING INITIAL
VALUE

Description
Button for selecting an item for which count-down operation is to be started from the life. A
selected item is preset to the life registered with the SELECTION ITEM CHANGE button.
Displays the count status of an item. One of the following three statuses is displayed:
COUNT STOPPED: Item for which the count type is NO COUNT. Count operation is stopped.
COUNTING:
Item for which the count type is other than NO COUNT and count operation
is in progress
"LIFE REACHED":
Item which has reached its life and for which the time in excess of the life is
being counted
Displays a maintenance parts name set with FPAssist.
At the time of initial setting, the title line functions as a button for selecting the initialization of this
item.
Indicates the remaining life of a maintenance part (in hours).
This item can also be preset to a desired time.
When the remaining life of a part is decreased to the ratio set with parameter No. 8911 or less, the
background color changes to red and the life warning signal is output. When the life is then
reached, the indication changes to an up-counter value indicating an elapsed time as a minus
value with the red background color unchanged.
Indicates the life of a maintenance part (in hours).
This item can be preset to a desired time.
When the life of a maintenance part is reached, the background color changes to red and the life
warning signal is output.
At the time of initialization, the title line functions as a button for selecting the initialization of this
item.
Select a maintenance part life count type from the following six types:
0:NO COUNT, 1:ALL TIME, 2:POWER-ON TIME, 3:OPERATING TIME, 4:CUTTING TIME,
5:POWER-OFF TIME
Set 0 as the count type of an item not set.
At the time of initialization, the title line functions as a button for selecting the initialization of this
item.
Button for presetting the lives of maintenance parts selected in NO. 1 to 10 to indicated life values
Button for resetting the signal used with the periodic maintenance function to post a warning and
life expiration to the PMC
Button for incorporating initial values set with FPAssist for an display item selected with the title for
the item

- 164 -

B-66254EN/05

7.23.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Periodic Maintenance Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1)


[Periodic maintenance screen 1/1]
17Screen name:
CHECK -1
0
OK
Setting periodic maintenance parts
Screen interlock signal
Life warning signal
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Parts name
S24
S24
S24
S24
S24
S24
S24
S24
S24
S24

A1_1
A1_2
Life
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1

Count type
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2

COUNT TYPE
0:NO COUNT
1:ALL TIME
2:POWER-ON TIME
3:OPERATION TIME
4:CUTTING TIME
5:POWER-OFF TIME

A1_1 : Set the signal for interlocking periodic maintenance screen


operation.
A1_2 : Signal for notifying the PMC that the life of an item is to be
used up very soon or is just used up. Set this output signal as an
automatic screen switch signal for the periodic maintenance
screen. This signal can be turned off with the RESET LIFE
WARNING button on the screen. Each time a life warning is
output for an additional part, this signal is output.
S24 : Set a periodic maintenance part name by using a character
string not longer than 24 half-size characters.
N1 : Set a life. Range: 0-65535 (in hours)
N2 : Set a count type for each periodic maintenance part.

- 165 -

B-66254EN/05

7.24

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

i MOTOR TEMPERATURE MONITOR SCREEN


When a spindle or servo motor of the i series is used, the current
temperature of the winding of the motor and the stoppage of the fan of
the motor or amplifier can be monitored on this maintenance screen. A
function for outputting a warning before a motor overheat alarm is
issued is provided. So, an abnormal motor temperature can be detected
at an earlier stage without stopping the current machining due to an
alarm.
The function for detecting abnormalities such as an abnormal
temperature notifies the PMC with the warning notification output
signal when the current temperature of a spindle or servo motor has
reached the warning temperature set in the sheet or the alarm level, or
when the stoppage of a fan is detected. This signal can be specified as a
signal for automatic screen switching.
The i motor temperature monitor screen is available with FPAssist
Version 5.30 and later and can be incorporated when the Series
18i-LNB is used.

7.24.1

Screen Configuration

Display item/parts

Motor name
Alarm level temperature
(bar graph)

WARNING (numeric
temperature indication)

Description
A spindle name or servo axis name not longer than 4 half-size characters set in the sheet is
displayed.
A bar graph for indicating an alarm level temperature is displayed in the background at the
top of the meter scale. An alarm level temperature and higher temperatures are indicated in
red, and temperatures below the alarm level are indicated in blue.
For a spindle, the value of parameter No. 4134 is indicated. For a servo axis, a temperature
set in the sheet is indicated.
A warning temperature set in the sheet is indicated as a numeric value. When the current
temperature has increased to a warning temperature or higher, the background of the
numeric indication field is turned on in yellow, and the warning notification signal and
temperature alarm signal are output. This warning temperature can be modified by touching
the numeric value indication field.

- 166 -

B-66254EN/05

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

Display item/parts
CURRENT motor
temperature (numeric
temperature indication)

CURRENT motor
temperature (meter
indication)
Fan stop notification
(lamp)
SETTING INITIAL
VALUE (button)
WARNING RESET
(button)
Signal name
Motor warning
notification signal
(output)

Temperature alarm
signal (output)

Description
The current temperature of the winding of a motor is indicated. When an alarm level
temperature set in the sheet is reached or exceeded for a servo axis, or when the
temperature set in parameter No. 4134 is reached or exceeded for a spindle, the background
of the numeric indication field is turned on in red, and the warning notification signal and
temperature alarm signal are output.

The current temperature of the winding of a motor is displayed by means of meter indication.
When an internal cooling fan for a motor axis, radiator cooling fan, or converter cooling
fan/radiator cooling fan stops, this lamp is turned on, and the motor warning notification signal
and temperature alarm signal are output.
Button used to incorporate a warning temperature set in the sheet into the operator's panel.
Use this button when an i motor temperature monitor screen is created for the first time on
the machine operator's panel or when the warning value is to be returned to a value in the
sheet.
When the operator confirms the output of a temperature-/fan-related warning, the operator
can stop the output related to the warning notification signal by pressing this button.
Description
When the current temperature of a spindle or servo axis has increased to the warning
temperature or higher, or the alarm level or higher, or when a fan stops abnormally, this
notification signal is output to the PMC. This signal can be specified as a screen switch signal
from the PMC. When the operator presses the WARNING RESET button, the output of this
signal is stopped. When an additional warning is output later, this signal is output again. This
common signal is used even when a two-path system is used.
When the warning notification signal is output, this signal indicates whether the temperature
warning represents an abnormal temperature relative to a warning temperature level or alarm
level temperature. When an abnormal temperature relative to an alarm level temperature
occurs with any one of the spindle and servo axes, the temperature alarm signal indicates an
abnormal temperature relative to the alarm level temperature.
Motor
warning
notification
signal

Temperat
ure alarm
signal

Normal temperature

Warning temperature
level reached or fan
stopped

Alarm level temperature


reached

(Undefined)

Temperature state

Description of signal state

Indicates that the temperatures of all of the spindle and servo


axes are below the warning temperatures.
Notifies that the temperature of at least one of the spindle and
servo axes is equal to or greater than the warning temperature
but is less than the alarm level temperature. Alternatively, the
stoppage of the fan of an axis was detected.
Notifies that the temperature of at least one of the spindle and
servo axes is equal to or greater than the alarm level
temperature.
The meaning of this signal state is undefined.

CAUTION
1 When a FANUC-manufactured spindle of a type older than the ai spindle is used,
neither its temperature nor the stoppage of a fan can be monitored.
2 When a configured spindle system consists of different types of spindles including a
FANUC-manufactured spindle of a type older than the i spindle, neither its
temperature nor the stoppage of a fan can be monitored.

- 167 -

B-66254EN/05

7.24.2

7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

i Motor Temperature Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table


(1/1)
[Alpha-i motor temperature monitor screen 1/1]
18 Screen name:
-1
0
OK
N1_1
Set if you create 2nd PATH screens.(0: No 2nd PATH screens, 1:Create 2nd PATH screens)
Path2 axis
Temperature
Path1 axis
Temperature
Alpha-i motor Alarm level
Warning
name
Alpha-i motor Alarm level
Warning
name
1st spindle
S4
N1_2
PRM.4134
N3_2
S4
N1_2
PRM.4134
N3_2
S4
N1_2
PRM.4134
N3_2
S4
N1_2
PRM.4134
N3_2
2nd spindle
1st axis
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
2nd axis
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
3rd axis
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
4th axis
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
5th axis
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
6th axis
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
7th axis
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
8th axis
S4
N1_2
N3_1
N3_2
Warning signal
Temperature alarm signal

A1_1
A1_2

N1_1 : Set 1 when a two-path system is used, and the motor


temperatures of the axes of path 2 are to be monitored. Set 0
when a single-path system is used or when the motor
temperatures of the axes of path 2 in a two-path system are not
to be monitored.
S4
: Set the name of each of the spindles and servo axes for each
path. A name set here is used on the motor temperature monitor
screen. Set an axis name not longer than 4 half-size characters
or 2 full-size characters.
N1_2 : Set a motor type by using the number 0, 1, or 2. The motor
temperature monitor screen is enabled only when a motor of the
i series is used. So, a motor type needs to be set. When a
motor of the i series is used, set N3_1 and N3_2 as well.
0: No motor axis is used, or a motor not manufactured by
FANUC is used.
1: A motor of the i series manufactured by FANUC is used.
2: A motor other than the ai series manufactured by FANUC is
used.
N3_1 : Set an alarm level temperature for a servo motor. By default,
140C is set. Usually, this default value need not be changed.
The alarm level temperature of a spindle motor varies from one
motor type to another. So, the temperature set in the CNC
parameter is employed.
N3_2 : Set a warning motor temperature. By using a minus value,
specify a temperature width by which the alarm level
temperature needs to be reduced in order to set a warning
temperature. By default, -10C is set. So, for servo motors, the
default warning temperature is 130C. For spindle motors, the
alarm level temperature less than this temperature setting
specified by the CNC parameter is the warning temperature.
Usually, the default value need not be changed.
A1_1 : Specify a warning notification signal bit to be posted to the
PMC when an abnormal temperature is detected.
A1_2 : Specify a temperature alarm signal bit to be posted to the PMC
to indicate what is a temperature alarm when an abnormal
temperature is detected.
- 168 -

B-66254EN/05

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL


This chapter explains the multi-language batch input tool, which is
used to set multi-language captions for the multi-language display
function available with FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist EDITION
6.00 (FPAssist Version 6.01) and later.
The batch input tool allows all multi-language captions in all forms in
a project to be listed in data sheets and set at a time. After caption
setting, data is written for all multi-language captions in each form at a
time by using the write button, and for the language set as the output
language of FPAssist, the caption data is reflected in FPAssist.
Use of this tool will largely reduce the multi-language setting
operation and the project re-creation operation from a conventional
single language project to a multi-language project.

- 169 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

8.1

B-66254EN/05

ENVIRONMENT, CONDITIONS, AND SETTING OF THE


MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

Environment and conditions of the multi-language batch input tool


To use the multi-language batch input tool, the customer must set up
the following environment and conditions:
Environment/conditions
Microsoft Excel2000
Necessary conditions
requested by Microsoft to
operate Excel2000

Supplementary
Service release 3 is required in addition to
Excel2000.
Conditions of OS, computer unit, memory, hard
disk, display, disk device, and so on are
defined.

Conditions of the FPAssist tool


The multi-language batch input tool runs on Excel2000. FPAssist that
supports the multi-language display function is FPAssist for
Excel2000. Therefore, for new projects, screen development in
Excel2000 must be selected. When an existing project was developed
with FPAssist for Excel95, version upgrading to FPAssist for
Excel2000 must be performed before the multi-language display
function can be used for the project.
For how to perform upgrading to FPAssist for Excel2000, see Section
4.1, "ACTIVATING FANUC PICTURE", and Subsection 4.3.10,
"Assistant V-UP". After changing to the operating environment of
FPAssist for Excel2000, use the Assistant V-UP button to upgrade the
version. Then, the multi-language display function and batch input
tool will become available.
Before FPAssist for Excel2000 can be used, the installed FANUC
PICTURE &FPAssist software must be able to use FPAssist for
Excel2000. If it cannot use FPAssist for Excel2000, follow the
procedures described in Section 3.3, "UNINSTALLING FANUC
PICTURE &FPAssist", and Section 3.2, "INSTALLING FANUC
PICTURE &FPAssist", to make FPAssist for Excel2000 usable.

- 170 -

B-66254EN/05

8.2

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

OPERATIONS OF THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT


TOOL
Before the multi-language batch input tool can be started, "The
Multi-language display function is used" must be checked in setting of
a custom screen development project.
The language keys of the output languages (Japanese, English, Polish
and Chinese) provided by FPAssist are already registered. You can
modify the language key data of the four languages but cannot delete
it. To add a language besides the four languages, register a language
key of the language.
Language data is stored in files in a subfolder created under the name
FPBatchInput in a project folder.
Multi-language batch input work sheets are created under the name
"project-name_MLT.XLS" in FPBatchInput. When the project name
is TEST, for example, the work sheet is named TEST_MLT.xls.
You may start the multi-language batch input tool by dragging and
dropping a multi-language batch input work sheet, TEST_MLT.XLS
in the above example, to the Excel2000 icon or by selecting [Files] [Open] after Excel2000 starts and directly opening TEST_MLT.xls
besides using the start menu button.

CAUTION
1 The multi-language batch input tool determines
whether to update multi-language setting sheets by
the date of update made by custom screen editing.
So, set the calendar timer of the personal computer
correctly.
2 While the multi-language batch input tool is
operating, do not modify any FANUC PICTURE
edit project. To modify an edit project, end the
batch input tool, then modify the project by using
the [Open Project] menu.
3 While the multi-language batch input tool is
operating, do not modify FPAssist. To perform the
write function of the batch tool, end FPAssist.
Therefore, one, but only one, of the multi-language
batch tool and FPAssist can be activated.
4 Flow diagnostic messages for multi-language
display can be created by using FPAssist. (Output
languages are limited to three languages.) For
details, see Appendix C.3, "CREATING FLOW
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES FOR
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY".

- 171 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

8.2.1

B-66254EN/05

Project Screen List Sheet


As the multi-language batch tool has started, the sheet named
MLT_LIST shown below is displayed. A certain time is required to
display the project screen sheet (MLT_LIST sheet) because form
names in a project and file information must be read and the project
screen sheet must be created.
The screen list sheet consists of a list of FPAssist forms created by
FPAssist and a list of user forms created using ANUC PICTURE.
The FPAssist screen sheet list is a list of function screens created by
FPAssist. The user creation (main) and user creation (sub) functions of
FPAssist are indicated in the form screen sheet list.
The form screen sheet list shows a list of the names of FPAssist user
creation (main) and user creation (sub) function forms and forms
created with FPAssist, as well as user forms added to vbp files.

Button/display item
Read button

Write button

Delete button

Option button

Description
This button is used to read the controls of screen names selected in the screen
name select check box for which multi-language caption setting is required and to
create a multi-language caption setting sheet for each screen.
When the "No use multi-language" property is checked for the control of a user form,
the control is not read.
This button is used to write captions set in multi-language caption setting sheets
corresponding to the screen names selected in the screen name select check box
into the multi-language property of the control of each form.
This button is used to delete multi-language caption setting sheets selected in the
screen name select check box. Only sheets are deleted, and the custom screen form
of the project is not deleted.
This button is explained in detail in Subsection 8.2.4, " Multi-Language Display of a
Project with Single-Language User Forms".

- 172 -

B-66254EN/05

Button/display item
ALL CHECK button

Update button

Version button

Select
Check box All select/
All cancel
Select
Check box
(for each created screen)
System name
A taken in Screen Name

The present Screen Name

Function Name

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL


Description
A multi-language caption setting sheet created for each screen has a function button
for checking whether set characters can be displayed by the display character type in
each control. The ALL CHECK button provides an equivalent function to pressing the
check buttons on all sheets. When a response with cancel is made to an error
notification dialog box displayed during checking, the checked form is placed in the
warning state, and checking proceeds to the next form.
When the batch input tool is started after creation of a multi-language batch sheet,
"FPAssist screen sheet list is re-created by obtaining FPAssist screen sheet
information again, which indicates whether screens have been added or deleted
(screen sheets have been changed) with FPAssist. When you have made an
addition, deletion, or other change to the language keys during setting of a project
and multi-language items in FANUC PICTURE, use this button to create a new
listing in the multi-language caption setting sheet to reflect a multi-language key you
have added, deleted, or renamed by the editing. All items including captions in the
table are not read by using this button. The captions and others are read at the next
processing stage by using the Read button.
This button displays the software version of the multi-language batch input tool.
For inquiries to the multi-language batch input tool, please let us know also this
version number.
This item is used to check or uncheck the check boxes of all screen names created
in a project.
These check boxes are checked to select target screen names for the functions of
the Read, Write, and Delete buttons.
A project name is indicated.
The names of screens of which form data has already been included in the
multi-language caption setting sheet by the Read button are indicated. When the
time stamp of a screen name at the time of the inclusion in the sheet differs from the
time stamp of the screen name of the current project, the background color becomes
magenta to indicate the possibility that editing may have been performed with VB.
Check whether to include the screen name to the sheet again or not.
When the batch input sheet is opened or when the read button in multi-language
setting is pressed, the screen names created in the project at that point of time are
indicated. When the time stamp of a screen name at the time of the inclusion in the
sheet differs from the time stamp of the screen name of the current project, the
background color becomes magenta to indicate the possibility that editing may have
been performed with VB.
Function names registered in FPAssist are indicated.

- 173 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

8.2.2

B-66254EN/05

Adding a Multi-Language Caption Setting Sheet


Among the screen names listed in the FPAssist screen sheet list or
form screen list, select screen names for which multi-language caption
setting is to be performed by checking their select check boxes. To
read all the listed screens, check All Select. Then, press the Read
button. Multi-language caption setting sheets having the same names
as form names are created.
To open the sheet of a form, click a blue screen name in A taken in
Screen Name. A jump to the multi-language caption setting sheet of
the selected screen is then made.

- 174 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

B-66254EN/05

8.2.3

Explanation of Displayed Multi-Language Caption Setting


Sheet Functions
When a read operation is performed, caption setting sheets are created.
Multi-language caption sheets have a caption setting table for the
language keys registered in setting of the project.
The left figure <1> shows an FPAssist multi-language setting sheet
and the right figure <2> shows a user screen multi-language setting
sheet of a user form when a read operation, which is an FPAssist
operation function, is performed.

<1> FPAssist multi-language setting sheet

Button/display item
CHECK button
NEED / OK / WARNING /
ERROR Status
<< , >> buttons
n/m
(1/2 in the
example in <2>)
Undo button
Shorten, Widen Button
ObjectID indication
Symbol
Property indication
Language key indication

(Multi-language caption
setting field)
Title following

<2> User screen multi-language setting sheet

Description
This button checks whether the characters of multi-language captions set in a form can
be displayed by the display character type for each control.
The result of the character check made by the CHECK button for the set captions is
indicated. For details, see Section 8.4, "CHECKING DATA SETTINGS".
These buttons are used to jump to the beginning of a table created for a control type.
The current position is indicated for a jump to the beginning of a table created for a
control type.
This button is used to restore a selected cell width for caption setting to its original width.
These buttons are used to shorten or widen a selected cell width for caption setting.
These buttons can be used to see long captions.
An object ID assigned to each control edited with VB is indicated. From this ID, the
location of a control in the form can be identified.
A caption property name is indicated. From this name, whether a setting item is an
OnCaption setting item or OffCaption setting item of a lamp and so on can be identified.
In the sample figure, language keys such as "JPN" and "ENG" are found in the language
key indication area. The language keys registered for a project are displayed
horizontally. In the columns of these language key indications, settings for languages
are made.
In white cells in the table, multi-language captions are set. Set captions in individual
languages.
The type of a control or FPAssist item name is indicated.

- 175 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

8.2.4

B-66254EN/05

Multi-Language Display of a Project with Single-Language


User Forms
This subsection explains how to allow multi-language display using
project data of a user form created with the FANUC PICTURE &
FPAssist product earlier than Edition 6.00.
If such data is read into a multi-language batch setting sheet without
performing the operation described below, captions are not set in the
setting sheet. Also data in the setting sheet cannot be set in forms by a
write operation. Screen forms automatically created by FPAssist
conversion, however, can support multi-language display if version
upgrading to multi-language FPAssist is performed, and conversion
and screen re-creation is performed. So, when there is no user form,
the operation described below is unnecessary.
<1> Setting of project - Setting of Multi-language
Check "The Multi-language display function is used.". The
language keys of the output languages (Japanese, English, and
Polish) of FPAssist are already registered. Language key data
may be changed if necessary, but these keys cannot be deleted.
To add another language besides the three languages, register a
language key.
<2> Start the multi-language batch tool.
<3> Press the Option button in the project screen list sheet.
<4> Settings in the option setup dialog box
Check "It assigns the language which specified Caption used
now.", and from the combo box, select a language key for which
the current caption is to be set. Select a language key set as the
output language of FPAssist.

<5> Press the OK button.


For all forms present in the project, the current caption is set as a
caption for the selected language key.

- 176 -

B-66254EN/05

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL


CAUTION
1 The forms to be processed are not related to the
select check box in the project screen sheet. The
forms output in the project folder are processed.
2 Each time the OK button is pressed, a write
operation is performed. Therefore, note that the
caption set for a language key is overwritten by the
second and subsequent write operations. When
this write operation is performed while an English
caption is displayed during editing on VB, for
example, the English caption is set for the written
language key, which indicates Japanese. As a
result, the previously set Japanese caption is
overwritten and lost.
3 If a language key different from the FPAssist output
language is selected, the language caption already
set on a screen that was created automatically by
conversion of FPAssist is overwritten by the
caption of the different language.
<6> Reading of forms on the project screen sheet
Check the all screen select check box, and create multi-language
caption setting sheets for forms.
For details, see Subsection 8.2.2, "Adding a Multi-Language
Caption Setting Sheet".
<7> Multi-language caption setting and write to forms
Subsequently, set multi-language captions and write them to
forms.

- 177 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

8.3

B-66254EN/05

ENTERING A MULTI-LANGUAGE CAPTION SETTING


SHEET
This section explains how to set multi-language caption setting sheets.
Two types of caption setting sheets, FPAssist multi-language setting
sheets and user screen multi-language setting sheets, are provided, and
captions are set in an appropriate form for each custom screen.

8.3.1

FPAssist Multi-Language Setting Sheet


A FPAssist multi-language setting sheet is created for each function.
A caption setting table for all forms (the maximum number of pages)
created by a function is displayed.
The caption setting table of FPAssist is created in a state close to the
FPAssist function settings.
The left figure shows the manual operation screen of FPAssist, and the
right figure shows the caption sheet of the manual operation screen of
the batch tool. The maximum number of characters that make up a
caption is the same as the number of characters indicated by FPAssist.

There is a caption setting table for an item not found in the FPAssist
function setting table. This setting table sets captions in three
languages output by FPAssist. This setting table is provided for each
control type. In the title field indicated with a control name is shown.
The maximum number of characters that make up a caption in each
setting table is determined by the character type and control width.
(The number of characters is applied on the assumption that the X and
Y coordinate values of characters is 0.)

- 178 -

B-66254EN/05

8.3.1.1

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

Cell division in a FPAssist caption setting table


In some caption setting tables, captions are divided into cells. This is
to follow the FPAssist setting table, and is used to change lines.
A line feed code " \n" may be entered in a cell. In this case, line feed
code "\n" is counted as one character.
When a setting table is divided
LMP01
PC
RUN
LMP02
AIR
LMP03
COOLANT
:

When a form is output


PC\nRUN
AIR
\nCOOLANT

Let us compare the sheets presented in Subsection 8.3.1, "FPAssist


Multi-Language Setting Sheet". While the manual operation screen
sheet of FPAssist has four cells, the caption setting table of the batch
tool has two cells. The batch tool provides two cells because the cells
that can be used on the actual operator's panel screen are only the left
two cells.

8.3.1.2

Entry not permitted in an FPAssist caption setting table


FPAssist caption setting tables may contain cells with yellow
background indication, which disable data entry.
Such a cell appears when a control is set so that it is not used or when
no form has been created.

- 179 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

8.3.2

B-66254EN/05

User Screen Multi-Language Setting Sheet


The following shows a caption setting table on a user screen
multi-language setting sheet:

A user screen setting sheet is created for each form.


A caption setting table is created for each type of control. Even when
a control has a caption created in a form, no caption setting table is
created for the control if a setting is made to disable display or when
the property "No use multi-language" (see Section 8.6) is selected.
In the user screen setting table, line feed code "\n" is not counted as a
character when it is entered. The maximum number of characters that
make up a control is calculated from the character type and control
width. (The number of characters is applied on the assumption that the
X and Y coordinate values of characters is 0.)

- 180 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

B-66254EN/05

8.4

CHECKING DATA SETTINGS


Batch sheets have a CHECK button.
After setting multi-language data, you can check the data set for a
sheet for possible error by using the CHECK.
By using the ALL CHECK button on the MLT_LIST sheet, you can
check all the batch sheets.

8.4.1

NEED
When a batch sheet is edited, need for checking is indicated in the
sheet. When a sheet needs checking, the write function cannot be
used.

8.4.2

ERROR
If invalid data is found during data entry into an FPAssist
multi-language setting sheet, a warning dialog box appears. If the
warning dialog box is ignored, and a character check is attempted
using the CHECK button without correcting the data, an error
indication appears.
"ERROR" indicates that the number of characters that can be
displayed is exceeded or that an illegal character is included. The
number of characters that can be displayed is checked on the
assumption that the X and Y coordinate values are both set to 0.
If an error is indicated, you cannot write multi-language captions into
a form. So, be sure to set correct data so that OK appears.

8.4.3

WARNING
If invalid data is found during data entry into a user screen
multi-language setting sheet, a warning dialog box appears. If the
warning dialog box is ignored, and a character check is attempted
using the CHECK button without correcting the data, a warning
indication appears.
"WARNING" indicates that the number of characters that can be
displayed is exceeded or that an illegal character is included. The
number of characters that can be displayed is checked on the
assumption that the X and Y coordinate values are both set to 0.
Data on a user screen multi-language setting sheet may be written into
multi-language captions on a form with this warning ignored. In this
case, however, the CNC discards the excess characters when a
character string is too long to display, and replaces an illegal character
with a blank.

8.4.4

OK
When a data check initiated by the CHECK button shows no data
error, the OK state is indicated.
If OK is indicated on a sheet, the write function can be used.
- 181 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

8.5

B-66254EN/05

DATA REFLECTION IN FPAssist


A write operation outputs data on a caption setting sheet to a form.
When data on the FPAssist multi-language setting sheet is written, the
data is reflected also in FPAssist. The language to be reflected is the
one set as the output language of FPAssist.

FPAssist manual operation screen sheet


when read

FPAssist manual operation screen sheet


after write

Read screen form


created by FPAssist
conversion with output
language set to 1

Write to FPAssist
sheet and manual
operation screen
form

FPAssist multi-language setting sheet when


read

FPAssist multi-language setting sheet after


write

Edit

- 182 -

B-66254EN/05

8.6

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

CONTROL TO BE READ IN USER FORM


Use of the multi-language function for a project is specified in setting
of the project. For controls of each form, a property for specifying
whether to use multi-language input is provided.
For example, when a control uses a label control as the background,
caption setting for multi-language display is unnecessary. When
controls do not set captions for labels and buttons, they need not be
read into user screen multi-language setting sheets by using the batch
tool. In such cases, check the "No use multi-language" property.

Even when use of the multi-language display function is specified in


setting of a project, a control is not read by the batch tool if the "No
use multi-language" property of the control is checked.

- 183 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

8.7

B-66254EN/05

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SCREEN SHEET LIST AND


FORM DATA
The batch tool records the time of update to a read form.
As a result of editing of a read user form or function, there is a
discrepancy between the caption setting table and the latest form
information.
For this reason, the batch tool checks the time of update when the
batch tool starts and when multi-language settings are read.
A message is displayed to indicate that the time of update of a read
sheet and that of a form differ, and the cells of the screen name or
function name are displayed in magenta. For such a screen name, read
the sheet again (reread).

Even when only a control color on the screen has been changed, the
above warning message appears because of the difference in time of
update. In such a case, you may continue setting caption data ignoring
the warning.
You may also perform a write operation. However, because
information in the setting table and the latest form information do not
match, the write function may not work correctly depending on the
changes made to the screen. Generally, when a screen name is
indicated in magenta, reread to a sheet should always be performed for
that screen name.

- 184 -

B-66254EN/05

8.7.1

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

Reread of an FPAssist Form


FPAssist conversion automatically creates a screen form for FANUC
PICTURE based on the settings in an excel sheet. The screen form
created by FPAssist is called an FPAssist form. Instead of FPAssist,
the edit function of FANUC PICTURE allows creation of a
machine-dedicated custom screen. Screen forms created with this
function are created user forms.
When new FPAssist forms are read, captions in the language set as the
output language for all screens of created FPAssist sheets are read into
the corresponding language cells on the batch tool sheet. At this time,
captions for lamps for which no ON signal is set and captions for
buttons of which mode is set to 0, that is, captions for lamps and
buttons that are not used, are not read.
When an FPAssist form is reread, the captions that have already been
read are not retrieved. When rereading is performed, newly added
captions are read, and the caption setting cells for captions that have
been deleted (set invalid or unused) are indicated as cells in which no
input is allowed and the captions previously set are no longer
contained. Note that an FPAssist form is reread as described below
after the batch tool sheet is edited.
The figure below shows a difference between batch tool sheet data
after read of an FPAssist form and that after reread of the FPAssist
form.
<1> Read caption data from an FPAssist form and output the data to a
sheet. ("Unused" is set for LMP03, so it is indicated as an item
that cannot be set.)
<2> Add and edit caption data. (In the example, captions are added to
JPN, and data in LMP02 of ENG is cleared.)
<3> Set "Used" for LMP03 and set Disabled for LMP01, convert
the FPAssist form, and reread caption data in the FPAssist form.

- 185 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

FPAssist form
Output Lng.= 1

B-66254EN/05

<1> Multi Language Tool


(Sheet state after read)
ENG
JPN
POL
LMP01 = lamp1
LMP01 =
LMP01 =
LMP02 = lamp2
LMP02 =
LMP02 =
LMP03 =
LMP03 =
LMP03 =
No write operation is performed with
the multi-language tool.

Read

LMP01 = lamp1
LMP02 = lamp2
LMP03 = lamp3
LMP03 Unused

<2> Multi Language Tool


(After editing of caption sheet)
ENG
JPN
POL
LMP01 = 1
LMP01 = lamp1
LMP01 =
LMP02 = 2
LMP02 =
LMP02 =
LMP03 =
LMP03 =
LMP03 =
FPAssist form
Output Lng.= 1
LMP01 = lamp1
LMP01 Unused
LMP02 = lamp2
LMP03 = lamp3
LMP03 Used

Reread

<3> Multi Language Tool


(After reread of FPassist form)
ENG
JPN
POL
LMP01 =
LMP01 =
LMP01 =
LMP02 = 2
LMP02 = lamp2
LMP02 =
LMP03 = lamp3
LMP03 =
LMP03 =

When rereading is performed, the captions in the multi-language


caption setting sheet that have already been read are not retrieved
from FPAssist form data. However, LMP01 has been valid but
now is invalid, and is indicated as an item that cannot be set in
the batch tool; LMP03 has been invalid but now is valid, and its
caption is read.
Caption data in a language other than the PAssist output
language is not reread.

- 186 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

B-66254EN/05

8.7.2

Reread of a User Form


Unlike the reread operation of an FPAssist form, the reread operation
of a user form re-creates the entire user screen multi-language sheet
each time. Therefore, note that language data set on a user screen
multi-language setting sheet is entirely discarded when a reread
operation is performed. Normally, language data set with a user screen
multi-language setting sheet is matched with the user form by the
write operation, so there is no problem.
The figure below shows a difference in data between a user screen
multi-language setting sheet after a read operation and that after a
reread operation.
<1> Read caption data from a user form and output to a sheet.
("Unused" is set for LMP03, so it is not entered in the table.)
<2> Add and edit caption data. (In the example, captions are added to
JPN, and data in LMP02 of ENG is cleared.)
<3> Set "Used" for LMP03, and reread the user form.

User-form

Read

LMP01 = lamp1
LMP02 = lamp2
LMP03 = lamp3
LMP03 Unused

<1> Multi Language Tool


ENG
JPN
LMP01 = lamp1
LMP01 =
LMP02 = lamp2
LMP02 =

POL
LMP01 =
LMP02 =

<2> Multi Language Tool (after editing of user screen


multi-language setting sheet)
ENG
JPN
POL
LMP01 = 1
LMP01 = lamp1
LMP01 =
LMP02 = 2
LMP02 =
LMP02 =

User-form
LMP01 = lamp1
LMP02 = lamp2
LMP03 = lamp3
LMP03 Used

Reread

<3> Multi Language Tool (After reread of user form)


ENG
JPN
POL
LMP01 = lamp1
LMP01 =
LMP01 =
LMP02 = lamp2
LMP02 =
LMP02 =
LMP03 = lamp3
LMP03 =
LMP03 =

Unlike reading of an FPAssist form, a user form is read in all


languages that have been set.
Rereading a user form re-creates a user form table for which
reading is specified, and resets all caption data in the user form,
thereby overwriting the ENG caption data set in <2>.

To add the table of a new control or a control for which a change from
"Unused" to "Used" was made while retaining the caption information
set in <2>, perform a write operation before the reread operation to
reflect the data in the user screen multi-language setting sheet in the
user form. Then, perform a reread operation. This enables the table of
LMP03 to be added while the data set or modified in <2> is kept
intact.
- 187 -

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

8.8

B-66254EN/05

UPGRADING THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT


TOOL
When you have upgraded the FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist package
software, you should also upgrade a multi-language batch input Excel
book created with an earlier version of the software.
Follow the procedure below.
<1> Click the Multi input menu button to open a batch input Excel
book created with an earlier version of the software.
<2> Select all function name sheets and click the Write button. Write
processing starts, and then you should ensure that the processing
completes successfully.
<3> End batch input with the earlier version (Exit Excel).
<4> Rename the xxx_MLT.xls sheet in the FPBatchInput folder (xxx
indicates a project name).
<5> Click the Multi input menu button to open a batch input Excel
book in a new version of the software.
<6> A sheet is created which lists the current project items. Select all
function name sheets and click the Read button.
<7> Read processing starts, and then you should ensure that the
processing completes successfully.
The batch input Excel book has now been upgraded. Exit Excel to
save the batch input Excel book.

- 188 -

APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

- 191 -

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

A.1

APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

ONE-BYTE CHARACTERS
The characters in the ranges 20-7F and A0-DF listed below can be
displayed.

NOTE
When the character of code 7F is output, the hatch
code is displayed.
When the character of code A0 is output, the
waveform cod is displayed.
This table is the code table based on the ESC 4 (standard character
set) mode.

- 192 -

APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

A.2

TWO-BYTE CHARACTERS

A.2.1

JIS Level 1

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

Among the kanji characters defined by JIS level 1, those characters


that can be displayed with the C language executor are listed in the
table below. The characters enclosed in parentheses in the table cannot
be displayed. If an attempt is made to display such a character, a
full-size blank is displayed. To the SJIS codes 885F to 889D,
FANUC-specific special characters are assigned. The FANUC special
characters are detailed later.

- 193 -

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

APPENDIX

- 194 -

B-66254EN/05

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX

- 195 -

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

APPENDIX

- 196 -

B-66254EN/05

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX

- 197 -

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

A.2.2

APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

JIS Level 2
Among the kanji characters defined by JIS level 2, the characters
listed below only can be displayed. If an attempt is made to display a
JIS level-2 character other than the listed characters, a full-size blank
is displayed.

- 198 -

APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

A.2.3

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

FANUC Special Characters


The table below lists the FANUC special characters assigned to JIS
level-1 codes.
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

SJIS [JIS ]
885F [2F40]
8860 [2F41]
8861 [2F42]
8862 [2F43]
8863 [2F44]
8864 [2F45]
8865 [2F46]
8866 [2F47]
8867 [2F48]
8868 [2F49]
8869 [2F4A]
886A [2F4B]
886B [2F4C]
886F [2F50]
8870 [2F51]
8871 [2F52]
8872 [2F53]
8880 [2F60]
8881 [2F61]
8882 [2F62]
8883 [2F63]
8884 [2F64]
8885 [2F65]
8886 [2F66]
8887 [2F67]
8888 [2F68]
8889 [2F69]
888A [2F6A]
888B [2F6B]
888C [2F6C]
888D [2F6D]
888E [2F6E]
888F [2F6F]
8890 [2F70]
8891 [2F71]
8892 [2F72]
8893 [2F73]
8894 [2F74]
8895 [2F75]
8896 [2F76]
8897 [2F77]
8898 [2F78]
8899 [2F79]
889A [2F7A]
889B [2F7B]
889C [2F7C]
889D [2F7D]

- 199 -

FANUC
752
754
756
758
075A
075C
075E
760
762
764
766
768
076A
077C
077E
780
782
1240
1242
1244
1246
1248
124A
124C
124E
1250
1252
1254
1256
1258
125A
125C
125E
1260
1262
1264
1266
1268
126A
126C
126E
1270
1272
1274
1276
1278
127A

Character
Right arrow()
Upper right arrow
Upper arrow()
Upper left arrow
Left arrow()
Lower left arrow
Lower arrow()
Lower right arrow
Clockwise arrow
Counterclockwise arrow
Small arc
Large arc
Small quadrangle
Finishing symbol 1
Finishing symbol 2
Finishing symbol 3
Finishing symbol 4
1/1
2/2
3/3
4/4
5/5
6/6

Millimeter(mm)
Centimeter(cm)
Kilometer(km)
Square centimeter(cm2)
Square meter(m2)
square kilometer(km2)
Cubic centimeter(cm3)
Cubic meter(m3)
Milligram(mg)
Kilogram(kg)
Cubic centimeter(cc)
Deciliter(dl)
Liter(l)
Kiloliter(kl)
Millisecond(ms)
Microsecond
Nanosecond(ns)
Horsepower(HP)
Horsepower(ps)
Hertz(Hz)
Joint-stock corporation((Inc.))
Copyright((c))

B.LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN

APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

LADDER DIAGRAM FOR


COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE
TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER
SCREEN
This ladder diagram provides an example of basic operation for
compensation value I/O input (with no parity check) with the Power
Mate i-LNA. Mode and valid range checks required in actual use are
not included.

- 200 -

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX

B.LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN

- 201 -

B.LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN

- 202 -

APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX

B.LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN

- 203 -

C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT


PROCEDURE

- 204 -

B-66254EN/05

C.1

APPENDIX C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE

OVERVIEW
By entering data in FPAssist sheets, create a FANUC Series 18i-LNA
/LNB flow diagnosis function database (character strings to be
displayed on the screen and diagnosis flow information for flow
diagnosis). The FPAssist sheets consist of four section as described
below.
<1> Flow diagnostic screen (1/4)
Enter the following information:

Fault code (type code, part code, maintenance level code,


suffix/alarm No) character strings

Fault title character strings

Presumed cause character strings

Message IDs at the start of flow diagnosis


<2> Flow diagnostic screen (2/4)
Enter information about flow diagnosis control and flow
diagnostic messages
<3> Flow diagnostic screen (3/4)
If a detailed description is required for a flow diagnostic message,
enter data in this sheet. An image file name and detailed
description can be entered.
<4> Flow diagnostic screen (4/4)
Enter a definition on the operation buttons to be displayed at the
bottom of the flow diagnostic screen. This sheet is not explained
here. See the description of the flow diagnostic screen.

- 205 -

C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

C.2

DATA CREATION AND INPUT PROCEDURE

C.2.1

Creating Display Information for Each Alarm/Information


Required for Diagnosis Flows
First, create information to be displayed when an alarm is issued, and
a diagnosis flowchart. Then, for each alarm, determine data to be
entered. (See the example of handling data provided later.)
For the number of characters and format, observe the restrictions
below.
Fault code (half-size characters)

Type code (3 half-size characters max.)

Part code (1 half-size character max.)

Maintenance level code (1 half-size character max.)

Suffix/alarm No, NC error code (16 half-size characters max.)


Various character strings

An alarm name (title) not longer than 32 bytes (16 full-size)


characters can be described in one line.

Up to three presumed causes (three lines), each not longer than


32 bytes (16 full-size characters), can be described.

Each flow element, not longer than 32 bytes (16 full-size


characters), can be described in up to 4 lines.
(For each flow element, prepare a message ID (consisting of up
to 6 half-size characters). A message ID is used as a jump
destination when a diagnosis flow is described in a flow
diagnosis sheet.)

- 206 -

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE

Example of handling data: 014 High pressure coolant fault

- 207 -

C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE APPENDIX

C.2.2

B-66254EN/05

Input of Data into Excel Sheets


Enter data created in Subsection C.2.1 into Excel sheets for each
alarm number.

C.2.2.1

Input of data into the fault diagnostic screen sheet


Enter a fault code, fault name (title), and presumed cause character
strings determined in Subsection C.2.1. In the message ID column on
the right side, enter the first character string to be displayed in flow
diagnosis, that is, the message ID at the start of the flow (flow
diagnosis sheet).
(See Fig. C.2.2.1 below.)

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

<5>

Fig.C.2.2.1 Example of entering data in the flow diagnostic screen sheet

<1> Screen number/alarm number (5 half-size numeric characters


max.)
Two-byte alarm code (decimal) entered from the PMC
<2> Fault code (to be entered using half-size characters)

Type code (3 half-size characters max.)

Part code (1 half-size character max.)

Maintenance level code (1 half-size character max.)

Suffix/alarm No, NC error code (16 half-size characters


max.)
<3> Fault title

A title not longer than 32 bytes (16 full-size characters) can


be entered in one line.
<4> Presumed cause

Up to three major presumed causes (three lines), each not


longer than 32 bytes (16 full-size characters), can be
entered.
<5> Message ID (consisting of up to 6 half-size characters)
Enter a message ID to be displayed at the start of a diagnosis
flow in the flow diagnosis sheet.

- 208 -

APPENDIX C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE

B-66254EN/05

C.2.2.2

Entering data in the flow diagnosis sheet


According to a created flowchart, enter flow diagnostic messages in
the setting table (2/4).
(See Fig. C.2.2.2 below.)

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

<5>

Fig.C.2.2.2 Example of entering data in the flow diagnosis sheet

<1> Entering message IDs and flow diagnostic messages

Enter a message ID in the column of message ID, then enter


the corresponding message character string in the same line
of the column of flow diagnostic message.

One flow diagnostic message cell can contain up to 128


half-size characters (= 32 half-size characters x 4 lines).

Enter \n to perform a new line operation intentionally.

When the first 32 characters of a character string entered are


displayed on the screen, the character string is automatically
wrapped to the next line unless you intentionally perform a
new line operation. Those characters at the end of a
character string beyond the 32 characters are not displayed.

Do not perform more than three new line operations in one


cell, and do not enter more than 32 half-size characters in
each line.

Change the color of the cell of a destination ID for a jump


from an NC diagnosis flow to light blue. (See the note
below.)

- 209 -

C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

NOTE
About calling the machine flow diagnosis from an
NC alarm
If the necessity of diagnosis on the machine side is
concluded after an NC alarm flow diagnosis, the
troubleshooting guidance function calls a special
message ID to make a transition to flow diagnosis
on the machine side. On the flow diagnosis sheet,
all message IDs starting with M are reserved as
jump destinations from an NC alarm flow diagnosis.
Those message IDs that start with M can be used
only as jump destinations from the NC.
[Reserved message IDs]
No.

Message
ID

M205

Rigid mode DI OFF

M407

Excessive
synchronous axis error

M409

Abnormal load
detected

M410

Excessive stop error

M411

Excessive move error

M420

Excessive torque
difference

M421

Excessive semi-closed
loop error

M436

OVC alarm

Alarm name

Presumed cause
The rigid mode DI signal (G061.0) is not set to 1 when
G84 (G74, G88) is executed.
Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical
synchronism with each other and are placed in a twisted
state.
A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a
load torque higher than a normal operation value.
A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an
axis from reaching a target position.
A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an
axis from moving.
Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical
synchronism with each other, resulting in a large torque
difference.
With a closed-loop machine, a shift occurred between
the motion of the motor and the motion of the separate
detector for a cause such as a mechanical twist.
A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a
large load and the flow of an excessive current.

In the future, a message ID to which a jump is made from


the NC may be added as development proceeds. So, do no
use a message ID starting with M which may or may not be
included in the table above.
<2> Diagnosis flow description

In the column of next message ID, set a message ID (for


each flow element) to specify a jump destination used when
YES and NO are replied.

Enter -1 if no operation is performed (no jump is made)


when YES or NO is replied.

For the end of a flow diagnosis, enter -1 in the columns of


YES and NO.
<3> Automatic diagnosis function and argument
Do not enter any data in these columns.
- 210 -

APPENDIX C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE

B-66254EN/05

<4> Button GRP number


Specify the group number of the touch buttons to be displayed at
the bottom of the screen. For details, see the description the flow
diagnostic screen.
<5> Note column
Information entered in this column has no effect on the data
entered in other columns. Use this column to enter information
such as a comment.

C.2.2.3

Enter data in the detailed description sheet


If detailed descriptions are required for flow diagnostic messages, an
image file and detailed description can be defined to explain each flow
diagnostic message. A defined image file and detailed description are
displayed on the detailed guidance screen.

<1>

<2>

<3>

Fig.C.2.2.3 Example of entering data in the detailed description sheet

<1> Message ID
Specify the message ID of a message for which an image file and
detailed description are to be defined.
<2> File name
Specify a desired image file name. A file in the BMP format or
JPEG format can be specified.
<3> Detailed description
Enter a character string as a detailed description. Enter the first
255 half-size characters (127 full-size characters) in the left-hand
column. Enter additional characters in the right-hand column.

- 211 -

C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE APPENDIX

C.3

B-66254EN/05

CREATING FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES FOR


MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
With FPAssist Version 6.01 and later, multi-language display and
creation of flow diagnostic messages in three languages including
Japanese, English, Polish and Chinese have become possible.
For multi-language display, multi-language settings are required.
See Subsection 4.3.3, "Setting a Project". Specifically, select the
[Setting of project] menu button of FANUC PICTURE then [Setting
of Multi-language], and check "The Multi-language display function
is used." to allow multi-language display switching.
The setting sheet of the flow diagnostic function registered in
FPAssist is regarded as the message sheet for the output language. To
create messages for other three languages, add a setting sheet for each
language.

C.3.1

Add Button for Multi-Language Setting Sheets


This button cannot be used unless "The Multi-language display
function is used." in [Setting of Multi-language] of the [Setting of
project] menu button of FANUC PICTURE is checked.
When this button is pressed, message creation sheets for languages
other than the language set as the output language are added. The
added sheets are for the remaining three languages.
The name of a sheet consists of the registered flow diagnostic screen
name and the characters registered in the Remark field of the language
key. ([Setting of project] dialog box - [Setting of Multi-language] tab Remark of the language key list displayed in the lower part)
Example)
When output
is "FLOW"
FLOW-JP
FLOW
FLOW-PL
FLOW-CH

language = 1, and the flow diagnostic screen name

- 212 -

(Message sheet for Japanese)


(Message sheet for English)
(Message sheet for Polish)
(Message sheet for Chinese)

B-66254EN/05

C.3.2

APPENDIX C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE

Deleting Multi-Language Setting Sheets


This button deletes added multi-language flow diagnostic setting
sheets for three languages.
Once a sheet is deleted, it cannot be restored.

C.3.3

Input of Data into Multi-Language Setting Sheets


The method for entering data into a multi-language setting sheet is the
same as for data entry into a setting sheet for a single language.
See Appendix C.2.2, "Input of Data into Excel Sheets".
Multi-language setting sheets contain cells having a light-yellow
background, in which no data can be entered. In such cells, data set in
the message sheet for the output language (the FLOW sheet in the
example in Appendix C.3.1) is set. For cells other than light-yellow
cells, set flow diagnostic language data.

- 213 -

D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA APPENDIX

METHOD OF TRANSFERRING
OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA

- 214 -

B-66254EN/05

B-66254EN/05

D.1

APPENDIX D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA

FUNCTION OVERVIEW
Among the machine operator's panel data items stored in the SRAM,
the data items listed below can be transferred to a specified D area of
the PMC at certain intervals.

Tool exchange counter screen


Stop value
Current value

48 items
48 items

Cycle time measurement screen


Cycle time
11 items
(Past 10 data items and reference value of total cycle time data)

Fault count screen


Fault count of today

284 items

Operational situation screen


Equipment fault occurrence count of today....................... 1 item
Equipment fault occurrence time of today......................... 1 item
Tool exchange count of today .......................................... 1 item
Tool exchange time of today ............................................. 1 item
Quality check count of today............................................. 1 item
Quality check time of today............................................... 1 item
Continuous off count of today ........................................... 1 item
Continuous off time of today............................................. 1 item
Parts full count of to today ................................................ 1 item
Parts full time of today ...................................................... 1 item
No-part count of today....................................................... 1 item
No-part time of today ........................................................ 1 item
Cycle time of today............................................................ 1 item
Number of machined parts of today .................................. 1 item
Operation rate of today ...................................................... 1 item
OK part rate of today ......................................................... 1 item

- 215 -

D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA APPENDIX

D.2

B-66254EN/05

DATA STRUCTURE
The structure of data transferred to a D area is indicated below. All
data is represented as binary values. With FPAssist, specify the start
address of a D area to which data is to be transferred. A specifiable
address is a multiple of 4. If an address other than a multiple of 4 is
specified with FPAssist, the specified address is rounded to the
multiple of 4 that is closest to and smaller than the specified value.
Offset from a D area start address specified with FPAssist
0
4
8

1st item of tool exchange counter stop value (4 bytes)

Unit: Times

2nd item of tool exchange counter stop value (4 bytes)


:

184
188
192
196
200

47th item of tool exchange counter stop value (4 bytes)


48th item of tool exchange counter stop value (4 bytes)
1st item of tool exchange counter current value (4 bytes)

Unit: Times

2nd item of tool exchange counter current value (4 bytes)


:

376
380
384
386
388

47th item of tool exchange counter current value (4 bytes)


48 item of tool exchange counter current value (4 bytes)
1st item of fault count of today (2 bytes)

Unit: Times

2nd item of fault count of today (2 bytes)


:

948
950
952
954
956
958

283rd item of fault count of today (2 bytes)


284th item of fault count of today (2 bytes)
Cycle time reference value (2 bytes)

Unit: 0.1 second

Cycle time past 1 (2 bytes)

Unit: 0.1 second

Cycle time past 2 (2 bytes)


:

970
972
974
976
978
980
982
984
986
988

Cycle time past 9 (2 bytes)


Cycle time past 10 (2 bytes)
Cycle time of today (operational situation screen) (2 bytes)

Unit: 0.1 second

Equipment fault occurrence count of today (2 bytes)

Unit: Times

Tool exchange count of today (2 bytes)

Unit: Times

Quality check count of today (2 bytes)

Unit: Times

Continuous cut count of today (2 bytes)

Unit: Times

Parts full count of today (2 bytes)

Unit: Times

No-part count of today (2 bytes)

Unit: Times

- 216 -

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA


988
992
996
1000
1004
1008
1012
1016
1020
1024

Number of machined parts (4 bytes)

Unit: Pieces

Operation rate of today (4 bytes)

Unit: 0.1%

OK part rate of today (4 bytes)

Unit: 0.1%

Equipment fault occurrence time of today (4 bytes)

Unit: Seconds

Tool exchange time of today (4 bytes)

Unit: Seconds

Quality check time of today (4 bytes)

Unit: Seconds

Continuous off time of today (4 bytes)

Unit: Seconds

Parts full time of today (4 bytes)

Unit: Seconds

No-part time of today (4 bytes)

Unit: Seconds

- 217 -

D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA APPENDIX

D.3

B-66254EN/05

METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL


DATA WITH THE FL-net FUNCTION
This section describes how machine operator's panel data transferred
to a D area can be read by another machine connected via FL-net.
For details of FL-net, refer to the "FL-net Operator's Manual
(B-63434EN)".
(1) Setting the FL-net parameters (on the server side)
*
The server side means the machine that transfers the SRAM
data of its operator's panel to a D area of the PMC.
On the FL-net parameter setting screen, set the items below.

IP ADDRESS
Specify an IP address.
With FL-net, an IP address of class C is used.
The default IP address used with FL-net is 192.168.250.***,
where *** represents a node number.
A node number from 1 to 254 is to be set.

MESSAGE
Specify the start address and size of a R area of the PMC to
be used for the transmission and reception interfaces of the
message transmission function with confirmation.
Set the items below.
<1> ADDRESS
Set the start address of a R area of the PMC to be used
for the transmission interface area of the message
transmission server function with confirmation.
Set the same value as set in the item of R area Trans
I/F address of [Setting of entire system (4/4)] of
FPAssist.
<2> SIZE
Set the size of the interface area above. Set 20.
<3> RECV ADDRESS
Set the start address of a R area of the PMC to be used
for the reception interface area of the message
transmission server function with confirmation.
Set the same value as set in the item of R area Receive
I/F address of [Setting of entire system (4/4)] of
FPAssist.
<4> SIZE
Set the size of the interface area above. Set 12.
*
Use the defaults for the other items.

- 218 -

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA

(2) Setting the FL-net parameters (on the client side)


*
The client side means the machine that requests the server
side to transfer the SRAM data of the machine operator's
panel.
On the FL-net parameter setting screen, set the items below.

IP ADDRESS
Specify an IP address.
With FL-net, an IP address of class C is used.
The default IP address used with FL-net is 192.168.250.***,
where *** represents a node number.
A node number from 1 to 254 is to be set.

MESSAGE
Specify the start address and size of a R area of the PMC to
be used for the transmission and reception interfaces of the
message transmission function with confirmation.
Set the items below.
<1> ADDRESS
Set the start address of a R area of the PMC to be used
for the transmission interface area of the message
transmission client function with confirmation.
<2> SIZE
Set the size of the interface area above. Set 20.
*
The client side does not use the receive interface of the
message transmission function.
*
Use the defaults for the other items.

- 219 -

D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

(3) Method of creating a user project for transferring server side data
The flow of a user program that starts with the issue of a data
transfer request to the server and ends with the actual transfer of
data is shown below.
Start

<1>

Prepare request
message

<2>

Set transfer
request flag to 1

<3>

Response flag set


to other than 1?

y
<4>

Response flag set


to 8000h?

y
<5>

Set response flag


to 0

Error processing

End

<1> Prepare a request message.


For reading data sent from the server, the byte block data
read function with confirmation or word block data read
function with confirmation is used.

When the byte block data read function with


confirmation is used
Set data according to the following format in the
transmission interface area set on the FL-net parameter
setting screen on the client side:

- 220 -

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA


0
2
3
4
5
6
8

Transfer
request/response flag
Request status
Response status
Cancel flag
Destination node number

(Reserved)
Transaction code

10
12

20

Offset address of
virtual address space

Data size
Start address of the
read data buffer

0
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12

16
18
20

Set 65003.

(Reserved)

16
18

Set 0.
Set 0.
Set 0.
Set the node number of the server side

Set 01014000h + Start address of a data


transfer destination D area on the server
side specified with FPAssist
Set 1024.
Set the start address of a R area for storing
data read from the server side.

When the word block data read function with


confirmation is used
Set data according to the following format in the
transmission interface area set on the FL-net parameter
setting screen on the client side:

Transfer
request/response flag
Request status
Response status
Cancel flag
Destination node number

Set 0.
Set 0.
Set 0.
Set the node number of the server side

(Reserved)
Transaction code

Set 65005.

(Reserved)
Offset address of
virtual address space

Data size
Start address of the
read data buffer

Set 0100A000h + {(Start address of a


data transfer destination D area on the
server side specified with FPAssist)2}
Set 512.
Set the start address of a R area for storing
data read from the server side.

<2> Set the transfer request flag to 1.


Set the transfer request/response flag of the transmission
interface area to 1 to issue a transfer request.

- 221 -

D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05

<3> Wait until a value other than 1 is returned to the response


flag.
Wait until a value other than 1 is returned to the transfer
request/response flag of the transmission interface area.
While the transfer request/response flag is set to 1, do not
rewrite the data in the transmission interface area.
<4> Check if the response flag is normal.
If 8000h is returned to the transfer request/response flag,
data transfer is terminated normally. In other cases, data
transfer is terminated abnormally.
In the case of normal termination, the data of 1024 bytes
starting at the start address of the R area specified in the
start address field of the read data buffer of the transmission
interface area is stored.
In the case of abnormal termination, stop processing, and
correct the cause of the error according to the value of the
response flag.
<5> Perform end processing.
Set the transfer request/response flag to 0 to be ready for
issuing the next request.

- 222 -

B-66254EN/05

APPENDIX E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP

OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP


When the built-in PLC is used without using the PMC, the operator's
panel is connected with a PLC ladder program via the M/N areas
indicated below. The pages that follow indicate an example of signal
arrangement in the M/N areas. The signal arrangement is indicated as
an example for reference. The user can freely change the signal
arrangement.
However, among the signals output from the operator's panel, the 48
bits from M0112 to M0117 are used as a work area internally by the
operator's panel, so the bits must be dedicated to the operator's panel,
and must not be used for other purposes.
The areas from N0400 to N0511 and from M0400 to M0511 are also
internally used as work areas for the operator's panel, so these areas
cannot be used for signals of the machine tool builder.

- 223 -

E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP APPENDIX


PMC address

PMC address

PMCCNC

N0000

Interface for one-path control


M0027

Interface for controlling the first and second index

Interface for the second spindle and data transfer

N0040

M0044

Interface for two-path control

N0069

CNCPMC

M0000

Interface for one-path control


N0017
Interface for the second spindle and data transfer
N0024

N0057
N0062

B-66254EN/05

Interface for controlling the first and second index axes

Interface for the second spindle under two-path control and machine
operator's panel DO

M0062

Additional interface

Interface for two-path control


Reserved

M0089
M0093
M0099

N0080

Interface for the second spindle under two-path control and machine
operator's panel DI

Additional interface

Reserved

M0112

Working area for operator's panel


M0118
Interface for operator's panel
Interface for operator's panel

N0080 to N0254

M0112 to M0254
~

Interface for controlling the fifth and sixth index

Interface for controlling the fifth and sixth index


N0272

M0274
Interface for load torque monitor

Interface for load torque monitor

N0300

M0300
Interface for controlling the third and fourth

Interface for controlling the third and fourth index

N0316
Interface for controlling the seventh and eighth
N0332

M0318
Interface for controlling the seventh and eighth
M0336

Safety circuit DI area

Safety circuit DO area

M0346

N0352

Signals
dedicated to
18i-LNB

Reserved

Reserved

N0400

M0400

Reserved area for operator's panel

N0511

For 18i-LNA,
used for control
of 3rd and 4th
index axes

M0256

N0256

Reserved area for operator's panel

M0511

- 224 -

APPENDIX E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP

B-66254EN/05

E.1
N0080
(0280)
N0081
(0288)

PLC OPERATOR'S PANEL (N0080 TO N0254)


7
Tool page 1
forecast
screen
Compensation
page 3 limit
screen

N0082
(0290)

Manual
selection

N0083
(0298)
N0084
(02A0)
N0085
(02A8)
N0086
(02B0)
N0087
(02B8)
N0088
(02C0)
N0089
(02C8)
N0090
(02D0)
N0091
(02D8)

Fault display
turn-on LMP08
Fault display
turn-on LMP16
Fault display
turn-on LMP24
Fault display
turn-on LMP32
Fault display
turn-on LMP40
Fault display
turn-on LMP48
Fault display
turn-on LMP56

N0092
(02E0)
N0093
(02E8)
N0094
(02F0)
N0095
(02F8)
M0096
(0300)
M0097
(0308)
M0098
(0310)
M0099
(0318)
M0100
(0320)
M0101
(0328)
M0102
(0330)
M0103
(0338)
M0104
(0340)
M0105
(0348)
M0106
(0350)

Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP08
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP16
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP24
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP08
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP16
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP24
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN08
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN16
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN24
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN04
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN12
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN20
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN28
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN08

Tool page 3
stop screen

Tool page 2
stop screen

Tool page 1
stop screen

NC-related
fault screen

Equipment
fault screen

Compensation
page 2 limit
screen

Compensation
page 1 limit
screen
Back-light
turn-off disable
condition
Fault display
turn-on LMP06
Fault display
turn-on LMP14
Fault display
turn-on LMP22
Fault display
turn-on LMP30
Fault display
turn-on LMP38
Fault display
turn-on LMP46
Fault display
turn-on LMP54
Fault display
turn-on LMP62
Fault display
turn-on BTN06
Fault display
blinking
BTN06
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP06
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP14
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP22
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP06
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP14
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP22
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN06
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN14
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN22
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN02
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN10
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN18
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN26
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN06

Tool page 3
pre-forecast
screen
Disable alarm
message
display
Fault display
turn-on LMP05
Fault display
turn-on LMP13
Fault display
turn-on LMP21
Fault display
turn-on LMP29
Fault display
turn-on LMP37
Fault display
turn-on LMP45
Fault display
turn-on LMP53
Fault display
turn-on LMP61
Fault display
turn-on BTN05
Fault display
blinking
BTN05
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP05
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP13
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP21
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP05
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP13
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP21
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN05
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN13
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN21
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN01
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN09
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN17
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN25
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN05

Tool page 2
pre-forecast
screen

Tool page 1
pre-forecast
screen

Run button
Fault display
turn-on LMP07
Fault display
turn-on LMP15
Fault display
turn-on LMP23
Fault display
turn-on LMP31
Fault display
turn-on LMP39
Fault display
turn-on LMP47
Fault display
turn-on LMP55
Fault display
turn-on LMP63
Fault display
turn-on BTN07
Fault display
blinking
BTN07
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP07
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP15
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP23
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP07
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP15
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP23
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN07
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN15
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN23
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN03
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN11
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN19
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN17
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN07

Reserved
screen

Path selection
Fault display
turn-on LMP04
Fault display
turn-on LMP12
Fault display
turn-on LMP20
Fault display
turn-on LMP28
Fault display
turn-on LMP36
Fault display
turn-on LMP44
Fault display
turn-on LMP52
Fault display
turn-on LMP60
Fault display
turn-on BTN04
Fault display
blinking
BTN04
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP04
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP12
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP20
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP04
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP12
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP20
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN04
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN12
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN20
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN28
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN08
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN16
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN24
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN04

- 225 -

1
Manual
selection
screen
Tool page 3
forecast
screen

Fault display
turn-on LMP03
Fault display
turn-on LMP11
Fault display
turn-on LMP19
Fault display
turn-on LMP27
Fault display
turn-on LMP35
Fault display
turn-on LMP43
Fault display
turn-on LMP51
Fault display
turn-on LMP59
Fault display
turn-on BTN03
Fault display
blinking
BTN03
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP03
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP11
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP19
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP03
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP11
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP19
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN03
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN11
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN19
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN17
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN07
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN15
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN23
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN03

Fault display
turn-on LMP02
Fault display
turn-on LMP10
Fault display
turn-on LMP18
Fault display
turn-on LMP26
Fault display
turn-on LMP34
Fault display
turn-on LMP42
Fault display
turn-on LMP50
Fault display
turn-on LMP58
Fault display
turn-on BTN02
Fault display
blinking
BTN02
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP02
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP10
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP18
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP02
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP10
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP18
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN02
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN10
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN18
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN26
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN06
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN14
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN22
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN02

0
Buzzer stop
screen

Tool page 2
Screen
forecast
switchscreen
ing, etc.
Compensation
page 4 limit

screen
Fault display

turn-on LMP01
Fault display
turn-on LMP09
Fault display
turn-on LMP17
Fault display
turn-on LMP25
Fault display
Fault
turn-on LMP33
display
Fault display
blinking
turn-on LMP41
Fault display
turn-on LMP49
Fault display
turn-on LMP57
Fault display
turn-on BTN01
Fault display
blinking

BTN01
Manual
operation 1

turn-on LMP01
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP09
Manual
operation 1
turn-on LMP17
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP01
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP09
Manual
operation 2
turn-on LMP17
Manual
operation 1
Manual
turn-on BTN01
operation
Manual
screen
operation 1
turn-on BTN09
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN17
Manual
operation 1
turn-on BTN25
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN05
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN13
Manual
operation 2
turn-on BTN21
Manual
operation 1

blinking
BTN01

E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP APPENDIX

M0107
(0358)
M0108
(0360)
M0109
(0368)
M0110
(0370)
M0111
(0378)
M0112
(0380)
M0113
(0388)
M0114
(0390)
M0115
(0398)
M0116
(03A0)
M0117
(03A8)
M0118
(03B0)
M0119
(03B8)
M0120
(03C0)
M0121
(03C8)
M0122
(03D0)
M0123
(03D8)
M0124
(03E0)
M0125
(03E8)
M0126
(03F0)
M0127
(03F8)
N0128
(0400)
N0129
(0408)
N0130
(0410)
N0131
(0418)
N0132
(0420)
N0133
(0428)
N0134
(0430)
N0135
(0438)
N0136
(0440)
N0137
(0448)
N0138
(0450)
N0139
(0458)

7
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN16
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN24
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN04
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN12
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN20
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN28

6
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN15
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN23
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN03
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN11
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN19
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN17

5
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN14
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN22
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN02
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN10
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN18
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN26

4
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN13
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN21
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN01
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN09
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN17
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN25

3
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN12
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN20
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN28
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN08
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN16
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN24

B-66254EN/05

2
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN11
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN19
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN17
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN07
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN15
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN23

1
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN10
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN18
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN26
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN06
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN14
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN22

0
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN09
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN17
Manual
operation 1
blinking
BTN25
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN05
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN13
Manual
operation 2
blinking
BTN21

Manual
operation
screen

Manual operation page 1 tool 1 (KOGU1)


Manual operation page 1 tool 1 (KOGU1)
Manual operation page 1 tool 2 (KOGU2)
Manual operation page 1 tool 2 (KOGU2)
Manual operation page 1 tool 3 (KOGU3)
Manual operation page 1 tool 3 (KOGU3)

Manual operation page 2 tool 1 (KOGU1)


Manual operation page 2 tool 1 (KOGU1)
Manual operation page 2 tool 2 (KOGU2)
Manual operation page 2 tool 2 (KOGU2)
Manual operation page 2 tool 3 (KOGU1)
Manual operation page 2 tool 3 (KOGU1)

NC operation
NC operation
NC operation
NC operation
turn-on LMP08 turn-on LMP07 turn-on LMP06 turn-on LMP05
Program check screen coordinate selection 5
#3
#2
#1
#0
NC operation
NC operation
NC operation
NC operation
turn-on BTN08 turn-on BTN07 turn-on BTN06 turn-on BTN05
NC operation
NC operation
NC operation
NC operation
turn-on BTN16 turn-on BTN15 turn-on BTN14 turn-on BTN13
NC operation
NC operation
NC operation
NC operation
turn-on BTN24 turn-on BTN23 turn-on BTN22 turn-on BTN21
NC operation
blinking
BTN08
NC operation
blinking
BTN16
NC operation
blinking
BTN24

NC operation
blinking
BTN07
NC operation
blinking
BTN15
NC operation
blinking
BTN23

NC operation
blinking
BTN06
NC operation
blinking
BTN14
NC operation
blinking
BTN22

NC operation
blinking
BTN05
NC operation
blinking
BTN13
NC operation
blinking
BTN21

NC operation
turn-on LMP04
NC operation
turn-on LMP12
NC operation
turn-on BTN04
NC operation
turn-on BTN12
NC operation
turn-on BTN20
NC operation
turn-on BTN28
NC operation
blinking
BTN04
NC operation
blinking
BTN12
NC operation
blinking
BTN20
NC operation
blinking
BTN28

- 226 -

NC operation
turn-on LMP03
NC operation
turn-on LMP11
NC operation
turn-on BTN03
NC operation
turn-on BTN11
NC operation
turn-on BTN19
NC operation
turn-on BTN27
NC operation
blinking
BTN03
NC operation
blinking
BTN11
NC operation
blinking
BTN19
NC operation
blinking
BTN27

NC operation
turn-on LMP02
NC operation
turn-on LMP10
NC operation
turn-on BTN02
NC operation
turn-on BTN10
NC operation
turn-on BTN18
NC operation
turn-on BTN26
NC operation
blinking
BTN02
NC operation
blinking
BTN10
NC operation
blinking
BTN18
NC operation
blinking
BTN26

NC operation

turn-on LMP01
NC operation
turn-on LMP09
NC operation
turn-on BTN01
NC operation
turn-on BTN09
NC operation
NC
turn-on BTN17
operation
NC operation screen
turn-on BTN25
NC operation
blinking
BTN01
NC operation
blinking
BTN09
NC operation
blinking
BTN17
NC operation
blinking

BTN25

APPENDIX E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP

B-66254EN/05

N0140
(0460)
N0141
(0468)
N0142
(0470)
N0143
(0478)
N0144
(0480)
N0145
(0488)
N0146
(0490)
N0147
(0498)
N0148
(04A0)
N0149
(04A8)
N0150
(04B0)
N0151
(04B8)
N0152
(04C0)
N0153
(04C8)
N0154
(04D0)
N0155
(04D8)
N0156
(04E0)
N0157
(04E8)
N0158
(04F0)
N0159
(04F8)
N0160
(0500)
N0161
(0508)
N0162
(0510)
N0163
(0518)
N0164
(0520)
N0165
(0528)
N0166
(0530)
N0167
(0538)
N0168
(0540)
N0169
(0548)
N0170
(0550)
N0171
(0558)

7
Tool exchange
1 CNT08
Tool exchange
1 CNT16
Tool exchange
2 CNT08
Tool exchange
2 CNT16
Tool exchange
3 CNT08
Tool exchange
3 CNT16
Tool exchange
1 reset08
Tool exchange
1 reset16
Tool exchange
2 reset08
Tool exchange
2 reset16
Tool exchange
3 reset08
Tool exchange
3 reset16
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 08
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 16
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 08
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 16
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 08
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 16
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 08
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 16
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 06
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 14
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 04
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 12

6
Tool exchange
1 CNT07
Tool exchange
1 CNT15
Tool exchange
2 CNT07
Tool exchange
2 CNT15
Tool exchange
3 CNT07
Tool exchange
3 CNT15
Tool exchange
1 reset07
Tool exchange
1 reset15
Tool exchange
2 reset07
Tool exchange
2 reset15
Tool exchange
3 reset07
Tool exchange
3 reset15
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 07
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 15
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 07
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 15
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 07
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 15
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 07
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 15
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 05
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 13
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 03
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 11

Tool exchange
1 blinking 08
Tool exchange
1 blinking 16
Tool exchange
2 blinking 06
Tool exchange
2 blinking 14
Tool exchange
3 blinking 04
Tool exchange
3 blinking 12

Tool exchange
1 blinking 07
Tool exchange
1 blinking 15
Tool exchange
2 blinking 05
Tool exchange
2 blinking 13
Tool exchange
3 blinking 03
Tool exchange
3 blinking 11

5
Tool exchange
1 CNT06
Tool exchange
1 CNT14
Tool exchange
2 CNT06
Tool exchange
2 CNT14
Tool exchange
3 CNT06
Tool exchange
3 CNT14
Tool exchange
1 reset06
Tool exchange
1 reset14
Tool exchange
2 reset06
Tool exchange
2 reset14
Tool exchange
3 reset06
Tool exchange
3 reset14
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 06
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 14
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 06
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 14
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 06
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 14
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 06
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 14
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 04
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 12
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 02
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 10
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 18
Tool exchange
1 blinking 06
Tool exchange
1 blinking 14
Tool exchange
2 blinking 04
Tool exchange
2 blinking 12
Tool exchange
3 blinking 02
Tool exchange
3 blinking 10
Tool exchange
3 blinking 18

4
Tool exchange
1 CNT05
Tool exchange
1 CNT13
Tool exchange
2 CNT05
Tool exchange
2 CNT13
Tool exchange
3 CNT05
Tool exchange
3 CNT13
Tool exchange
1 reset05
Tool exchange
1 reset13
Tool exchange
2 reset05
Tool exchange
2 reset13
Tool exchange
3 reset05
Tool exchange
3 reset13
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 05
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 13
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 05
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 13
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 05
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 13
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 05
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 13
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 03
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 11
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 01
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 09
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 17
Tool exchange
1 blinking 05
Tool exchange
1 blinking 13
Tool exchange
2 blinking 03
Tool exchange
2 blinking 11
Tool exchange
3 blinking 01
Tool exchange
3 blinking 09
Tool exchange
3 blinking 17

3
Tool exchange
1 CNT04
Tool exchange
1 CNT12
Tool exchange
2 CNT04
Tool exchange
2 CNT12
Tool exchange
3 CNT04
Tool exchange
3 CNT12
Tool exchange
1 reset04
Tool exchange
1 reset12
Tool exchange
2 reset04
Tool exchange
2 reset12
Tool exchange
3 reset04
Tool exchange
3 reset12
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 04
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 12
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 04
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 12
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 04
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 12
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 04
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 12
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 02
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 10
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 18
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 08
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 16
Tool exchange
1 blinking 04
Tool exchange
1 blinking 12
Tool exchange
2 blinking 02
Tool exchange
2 blinking 10
Tool exchange
2 blinking 18
Tool exchange
3 blinking 08
Tool exchange
3 blinking 16

- 227 -

2
Tool exchange
1 CNT03
Tool exchange
1 CNT11
Tool exchange
2 CNT03
Tool exchange
2 CNT11
Tool exchange
3 CNT03
Tool exchange
3 CNT11
Tool exchange
1 reset03
Tool exchange
1 reset11
Tool exchange
2 reset03
Tool exchange
2 reset11
Tool exchange
3 reset03
Tool exchange
3 reset11
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 03
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 11
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 03
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 11
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 03
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 11
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 03
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 11
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 01
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 09
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 17
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 07
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 15
Tool exchange
1 blinking 03
Tool exchange
1 blinking 11
Tool exchange
2 blinking 01
Tool exchange
2 blinking 09
Tool exchange
2 blinking 17
Tool exchange
3 blinking 07
Tool exchange
3 blinking 15

1
Tool exchange
1 CNT02
Tool exchange
1 CNT10
Tool exchange
2 CNT02
Tool exchange
2 CNT10
Tool exchange
3 CNT02
Tool exchange
3 CNT10
Tool exchange
1 reset02
Tool exchange
1 reset10
Tool exchange
2 reset02
Tool exchange
2 reset10
Tool exchange
3 reset02
Tool exchange
3 reset10
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 02
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 10
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 02
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 10
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 02
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 10
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 02
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 10
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 18
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 08
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 16
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 06
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 14
Tool exchange
1 blinking 02
Tool exchange
1 blinking 10
Tool exchange
1 blinking 18
Tool exchange
2 blinking 08
Tool exchange
2 blinking 16
Tool exchange
3 blinking 06
Tool exchange
3 blinking 14

0
Tool exchange
1 CNT01
Tool exchange
1 CNT09
Tool exchange
2 CNT01
Tool exchange
2 CNT09
Tool exchange
3 CNT01
Tool exchange
3 CNT09
Tool exchange
1 reset01
Tool exchange
1 reset09
Tool exchange
2 reset01
Tool exchange
2 reset09
Tool exchange
3 reset01
Tool exchange
3 reset09
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 01
Tool exchange
1 detected
fault 09
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 01
Tool exchange
2 detected
fault 09
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 01
Tool exchange
3 detected
fault 09
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 01
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 09
Tool exchange
1 turn-on 17
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 07
Tool exchange
2 turn-on 15
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 05
Tool exchange
3 turn-on 13
Tool exchange
1 blinking 01
Tool exchange
1 blinking 09
Tool exchange
1 blinking 17
Tool exchange
2 blinking 07
Tool exchange
2 blinking 15
Tool exchange
3 blinking 05
Tool exchange
3 blinking 13

Tool
exchange
counter
screen

E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP APPENDIX

N0172
(0560)
N0173
(0568)
N0174
(0570)
N0175
(0578)
N0176
(0580)
N0177
(0588)
N0178
(0590)
N0179
(0598)
N0180
(05A0)
N0181
(05A8)
N0182
(05B0)
N0183
(05B8)
N0184
(05C0)
N0185
(05C8)
N0186
(05D0)
N0187
(05D8)
N0188
(05E0)
N0189
(05E8)

7
Tool
compensation
2 turn-on
BTN03
Tool
compensation
4 turn-on
BTN01
Tool
compensation
1 blinking
BTN04
Tool
compensation
3 blinking
BTN02
Tool
compensation
4 blinking
BTN05
Operation 8
start
Operation 16
start
Operation 24
start
Operation 32
start
Operation 4
end
Operation 12
end
Operation 20
end
Operation 28
end
Operation 36
end

6
Tool
compensation
2 turn-on
BTN02
Tool
compensation
3 turn-on
BTN05
Tool
compensation
1 blinking
BTN03
Tool
compensation
3 blinking
BTN01
Tool
compensation
4 blinking
BTN04
Operation 7
start
Operation 15
start
Operation 23
start
Operation 31
start
Operation 3
end
Operation 11
end
Operation 19
end
Operation 27
end
Operation 35
end

5
Tool
compensation
2 turn-on
BTN01
Tool
compensation
31 turn-on
BTN04
Tool
compensation
1 blinking
BTN02
Tool
compensation
2 blinking
BTN05
Tool
compensation
4 blinking
BTN03
Operation 6
start
Operation 14
start
Operation 22
start
Operation 30
start
Operation 2
end
Operation 10
end
Operation 18
end
Operation 26
end
Operation 34
end

4
Tool
compensation
1 turn-on
BTN05
Tool
compensation
3 turn-on
BTN03
Tool
compensation
1 blinking
BTN01
Tool
compensation
2 blinking
BTN04
Tool
compensation
4 blinking
BTN02
Operation 5
start
Operation 13
start
Operation 21
start
Operation 29
start
Operation 1
end
Operation 9
end
Operation 17
end
Operation 25
end
Operation 33
end

3
Tool
compensation
1 turn-on
BTN04
Tool
compensation
3 turn-on
BTN02
Tool
compensation
4 turn-on
BTN05
Tool
compensation
2 blinking
BTN03
Tool
compensation
4 blinking
BTN01
Operation 4
start
Operation 12
start
Operation 20
start
Operation 28
start
Operation 36
start
Operation 8
end
Operation 16
end
Operation 24
end
Operation 32
end

N0196
(0620)
N0197
(0628)
N0198
(0630)

Operation
status 1
command
LMP15
Operation
status 1
command
LMP31
Operation
status 1
command
LMP47
Operation
status 2
command
LMP15
Operation
status 2
command
LMP31
Operation
status 2
command
LMP47
Operation
status 3
command
LMP15

Operation
status 1
command
LMP13
Operation
status 1
command
LMP29
Operation
status 1
command
LMP45
Operation
status 2
command
LMP13
Operation
status 2
command
LMP29
Operation
status 2
command
LMP45
Operation
status 3
command
LMP13

Operation
status 1
command
LMP11
Operation
status 1
command
LMP27
Operation
status 1
command
LMP43
Operation
status 2
command
LMP11
Operation
status 2
command
LMP27
Operation
status 2
command
LMP43
Operation
status 3
command
LMP11

Operation
status 1
command
LMP09
Operation
status 1
command
LMP25
Operation
status 1
command
LMP41
Operation
status 2
command
LMP09
Operation
status 2
command
LMP25
Operation
status 2
command
LMP41
Operation
status 3
command
LMP09

Operation
status 1
command
LMP07
Operation
status 1
command
LMP23
Operation
status 1
command
LMP39
Operation
status 2
command
LMP07
Operation
status 2
command
LMP23
Operation
status 2
command
LMP39
Operation
status 3
command
LMP07

- 228 -

Tool
compensation
counter

Cycle
time
measure
-ment
screen

Operational
situation
screen

ANDON signal 2

Motion sequence number

N0195
(0618)

0
Tool
compensation
1 turn-on
BTN01
Tool
compensation
2 turn-on
BTN04
Tool
compensation
4 turn-on
BTN02
Tool
compensation
1 blinking
BTN05
Tool
compensation
3 blinking
BTN03
Operation 1
start
Operation 9
start
Operation 17
start
Operation 25
start
Operation 33
start
Operation 5
end
Operation 13
end
Operation 21
end
Operation 29
end

ANDON signal 2

N0191
(05F8)

N0194
(0610)

1
Tool
compensation
1 turn-on
BTN02
Tool
compensation
2 turn-on
BTN05
Tool
compensation
4 turn-on
BTN03
Tool
compensation
2 blinking
BTN01
Tool
compensation
31 blinking
BTN04
Operation 2
start
Operation 10
start
Operation 18
start
Operation 26
start
Operation 34
start
Operation 6
end
Operation 14
end
Operation 22
end
Operation 30
end

ANDON signal 1

Motion sequence number

N0193
(0608)

2
Tool
compensation
1 turn-on
BTN03
Tool
compensation
3 turn-on
BTN01
Tool
compensation
4 turn-on
BTN04
Tool
compensation
2 blinking
BTN02
Tool
compensation
3 blinking
BTN05
Operation 3
start
Operation 11
start
Operation 19
start
Operation 27
start
Operation 35
start
Operation 7
end
Operation 15
end
Operation 23
end
Operation 31
end

ANDON signal 1

N0190
(05F0)

N0192
(0600)

B-66254EN/05

Manual
operation 2

Operation
status 1
command
LMP05
Operation
status 1
command
LMP21
Operation
status 1
command
LMP37
Operation
status 2
command
LMP05
Operation
status 2
command
LMP21
Operation
status 2
command
LMP37
Operation
status 3
command
LMP05

Operation
status 1
command
LMP03
Operation
status 1
command
LMP19
Operation
status 1
command
LMP35
Operation
status 2
command
LMP03
Operation
status 2
command
LMP19
Operation
status 2
command
LMP35
Operation
status 3
command
LMP03

Operation
status 1
command
LMP01
Operation
status 1
command
LMP17
Operation
status 1
command
LMP33
Operation
status 2
command
LMP01
Operation
status 2
command
LMP17
Operation
status 2
command
LMP33
Operation
status 3
command
LMP01

Operation
status
monitor
screen

APPENDIX E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP

B-66254EN/05

N0199
(0638)
N0200
(0640)
N0201
(0648)
N0202
(0650)
N0203
(0658)
N0204
(0660)
N0205
(0668)
N0206
(0670)
N0207
(0678)
N0208
(0680)
N0209
(0688)
N0210
(0690)
N0211
(0698)
N0212
(06A0)
N0213
(06A8)
N0214
(06B0)
N0215
(06B8)
N0216
(06C0)
N0217
(06C8)
N0218
(06D0)
N0219
(06D8)
N0220
(06E0)
N0221
(06E8)
N0222
(06F0)
N0223
(06F8)
N0224
(0700)
N0225
(0708)
N0226
(0710)

7
Operation
status 3
command
LMP31
Operation
status 3
command
LMP47
Operation
status 1
command
LMP16
Operation
status 1
command
LMP32
Operation
status 1
command
LMP48
Operation
status 2
command
LMP16
Operation
status 2
command
LMP32
Operation
status 2
command
LMP48
Operation
status 3
command
LMP16
Operation
status 3
command
LMP32
Operation
status 3
command
LMP48
Fault 8
occurrence
Fault 16
occurrence
Fault 24
occurrence
Fault 32
occurrence
Fault 40
occurrence
Fault 48
occurrence
Fault 56
occurrence
Fault 64
occurrence
Fault 72
occurrence
Fault 80
occurrence
Fault 88
occurrence
Fault 96
occurrence
Fault 104
occurrence
Fault 112
occurrence
Fault 120
occurrence
Fault 128
occurrence
Fault 136
occurrence

6
Operation
status 3
command
LMP29
Operation
status 3
command
LMP45
Operation
status 1
command
LMP14
Operation
status 1
command
LMP30
Operation
status 1
command
LMP46
Operation
status 2
command
LMP14
Operation
status 2
command
LMP30
Operation
status 2
command
LMP46
Operation
status 3
command
LMP14
Operation
status 3
command
LMP30
Operation
status 3
command
LMP46
Fault 7
occurrence
Fault 15
occurrence
Fault 23
occurrence
Fault 31
occurrence
Fault 39
occurrence
Fault 47
occurrence
Fault 55
occurrence
Fault 63
occurrence
Fault 71
occurrence
Fault 79
occurrence
Fault 87
occurrence
Fault 95
occurrence
Fault 103
occurrence
Fault 111
occurrence
Fault 119
occurrence
Fault 127
occurrence
Fault 135
occurrence

5
Operation
status 3
command
LMP27
Operation
status 3
command
LMP43
Operation
status 1
command
LMP12
Operation
status 1
command
LMP28
Operation
status 1
command
LMP44
Operation
status 2
command
LMP12
Operation
status 2
command
LMP28
Operation
status 2
command
LMP44
Operation
status 3
command
LMP12
Operation
status 3
command
LMP28
Operation
status 3
command
LMP44
Fault 6
occurrence
Fault 14
occurrence
Fault 22
occurrence
Fault 30
occurrence
Fault 38
occurrence
Fault 46
occurrence
Fault 54
occurrence
Fault 62
occurrence
Fault 70
occurrence
Fault 78
occurrence
Fault 86
occurrence
Fault 94
occurrence
Fault 102
occurrence
Fault 110
occurrence
Fault 118
occurrence
Fault 126
occurrence
Fault 134
occurrence

4
Operation
status 3
command
LMP25
Operation
status 3
command
LMP41
Operation
status 1
command
LMP10
Operation
status 1
command
LMP26
Operation
status 1
command
LMP42
Operation
status 2
command
LMP10
Operation
status 2
command
LMP26
Operation
status 2
command
LMP42
Operation
status 3
command
LMP10
Operation
status 3
command
LMP26
Operation
status 3
command
LMP42
Fault 5
occurrence
Fault 13
occurrence
Fault 21
occurrence
Fault 29
occurrence
Fault 37
occurrence
Fault 45
occurrence
Fault 53
occurrence
Fault 61
occurrence
Fault 69
occurrence
Fault 77
occurrence
Fault 85
occurrence
Fault 93
occurrence
Fault 101
occurrence
Fault 109
occurrence
Fault 117
occurrence
Fault 125
occurrence
Fault 133
occurrence

3
Operation
status 3
command
LMP23
Operation
status 3
command
LMP39
Operation
status 1
command
LMP08
Operation
status 1
command
LMP24
Operation
status 1
command
LMP40
Operation
status 2
command
LMP08
Operation
status 2
command
LMP24
Operation
status 2
command
LMP40
Operation
status 3
command
LMP08
Operation
status 3
command
LMP24
Operation
status 3
command
LMP40
Fault 4
occurrence
Fault 12
occurrence
Fault 20
occurrence
Fault 28
occurrence
Fault 36
occurrence
Fault 44
occurrence
Fault 52
occurrence
Fault 60
occurrence
Fault 68
occurrence
Fault 76
occurrence
Fault 84
occurrence
Fault 92
occurrence
Fault 100
occurrence
Fault 108
occurrence
Fault 116
occurrence
Fault 124
occurrence
Fault 132
occurrence

- 229 -

2
Operation
status 3
command
LMP21
Operation
status 3
command
LMP37
Operation
status 1
command
LMP06
Operation
status 1
command
LMP22
Operation
status 1
command
LMP38
Operation
status 2
command
LMP06
Operation
status 2
command
LMP22
Operation
status 2
command
LMP38
Operation
status 3
command
LMP06
Operation
status 3
command
LMP22
Operation
status 3
command
LMP38
Fault 3
occurrence
Fault 11
occurrence
Fault 19
occurrence
Fault 27
occurrence
Fault 35
occurrence
Fault 43
occurrence
Fault 51
occurrence
Fault 59
occurrence
Fault 67
occurrence
Fault 75
occurrence
Fault 83
occurrence
Fault 91
occurrence
Fault 99
occurrence
Fault 107
occurrence
Fault 115
occurrence
Fault 123
occurrence
Fault 131
occurrence

1
Operation
status 3
command
LMP19
Operation
status 3
command
LMP35
Operation
status 1
command
LMP04
Operation
status 1
command
LMP20
Operation
status 1
command
LMP36
Operation
status 2
command
LMP04
Operation
status 2
command
LMP20
Operation
status 2
command
LMP36
Operation
status 3
command
LMP04
Operation
status 3
command
LMP20
Operation
status 3
command
LMP36
Fault 2
occurrence
Fault 10
occurrence
Fault 18
occurrence
Fault 26
occurrence
Fault 34
occurrence
Fault 42
occurrence
Fault 50
occurrence
Fault 58
occurrence
Fault 66
occurrence
Fault 74
occurrence
Fault 82
occurrence
Fault 90
occurrence
Fault 98
occurrence
Fault 106
occurrence
Fault 114
occurrence
Fault 122
occurrence
Fault 130
occurrence

0
Operation
status 3
command
LMP17
Operation
status 3
command
LMP33
Operation
status 1
command
LMP02
Operation
status 1
command
LMP18
Operation
status 1
command
LMP34
Operation
status 2
command
LMP02
Operation
status 2
command
LMP18
Operation
status 2
command
LMP34
Operation
status 3
command
LMP02
Operation
status 3
command
LMP18
Operation
status 3
command
LMP34
Fault 1
occurrence
Fault 9
occurrence
Fault 17
occurrence
Fault 25
occurrence
Fault 33
occurrence
Fault 41
occurrence
Fault 49
occurrence
Fault 57
occurrence
Fault 65
occurrence
Fault 73
occurrence
Fault 81
occurrence
Fault 89
occurrence
Fault 97
occurrence
Fault 105
occurrence
Fault 113
occurrence
Fault 121
occurrence
Fault 129
occurrence

Operation
status
monitor
screen

Fault
count
screen

E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP APPENDIX

N0227
(0718)
N0228
(0720)
N0229
(0728)
N0230
(0730)
N0231
(0738)
N0232
(0740)
N0233
(0748)
N0234
(0750)
N0235
(0758)
N0236
(0760)
N0237
(0768)

7
Fault 144
occurrence
Fault 152
occurrence
Fault 160
occurrence
Fault 168
occurrence
Alarm code
read request

6
Fault 143
occurrence
Fault 151
occurrence
Fault 159
occurrence
Fault 167
occurrence

5
Fault 142
occurrence
Fault 150
occurrence
Fault 158
occurrence
Fault 166
occurrence

4
Fault 141
occurrence
Fault 149
occurrence
Fault 157
occurrence
Fault 165
occurrence

3
Fault 140
occurrence
Fault 148
occurrence
Fault 156
occurrence
Fault 164
occurrence

B-66254EN/05

2
Fault 139
occurrence
Fault 147
occurrence
Fault 155
occurrence
Fault 163
occurrence

1
Fault 138
occurrence
Fault 146
occurrence
Fault 154
occurrence
Fault 162
occurrence

0
Fault 137
occurrence
Fault 145
occurrence
Fault 153
occurrence
Fault 161
occurrence
Alarm timer
stop

Alarm code data 1


Alarm code data 2

N0238
(0770)

Station 1 R
completed

Station 1 R
running

Station 1
clamp

Station 1
conveyor
running

Station 1
unclamp

Station 1 L
running

Station 1 L
completed

Station 1 L
cont.

N0239
(0778)

Station 2 R
running

Station 2
clamp

Station 2
conveyor
running

Station 2
unclamp

Station 2 L
running

Station 2 L
completed

Station 2 L
cont.

Station 1 R
cont.

N0240
(0780)

Station 3
clamp

Station 3
conveyor
running

Station 3
unclamp

Station 3 L
running

Station 3 L
completed

Station 3 L
cont.

Station 2 R
cont.

Station 2 R
completed

Station 4
unclamp

Station 4 L
running

Station 4 L
completed

Station 4 L
cont.

Station 3 R
cont.

Station 3 R
completed

Station 3 R
running

N0242
(0790)

Station 4
conveyor
running
Station 5
unclamp

Station 5 L
running

Station 5 L
completed

Station 5 L
cont.

Station 4 R
cont.

Station 4 R
completed

Station 4 R
running

N0243
(0798)

Station 6 L
running

Station 6 L
completed

Station 6 L
cont.

Station 5 R
cont.

Station 5 R
completed

Station 5R
running

Station 5
clamp

Station 4
clamp
Station 5
conveyor
running

N0244
(07A0)

Station 7 L
completed

Station 7 L
cont.

Station 6 R
cont.

Station 6 R
completed

Station 6 R
running

Station 6
clamp

Station 6
conveyor
running

Station 6
unclamp

N0245
(07A8)

Station 8 L
cont.

Station 7 R
cont.

Station 7 R
completed

Station 7 R
running

Station 7
clamp

Station 7
conveyor
running

Station 7
unclamp

Station 7 L
running

N0246
(07B0)

Station 8 R
cont.

Station 8 R
completed

Station 8 R
running

Station 8
clamp

Station 8
conveyor
running

Station 8
unclamp

Station 8 L
running

Station 8 L
completed

N0247
(07B8)

Station 9 R
completed

Station 9 R
running

Station 9
clamp

Station 9
conveyor
running

Station 9
unclamp

Station 9 L
running

Station 9 L
completed

Station 9 L
cont.

N0248
(07C0)

Station 10 R
running

Station 10
clamp

Station 10
conveyor
running

Station 10
unclamp

Station 10 L
running

Station 10 L
completed

Station 10 L
cont.

Station 9 R
cont.

N0249
(07C8)

Station 11
clamp

Station 11
conveyor
running

Station 11
unclamp

Station 11 L
running

Station 11 L
completed

Station 11 L
cont.

Station 10 R
cont.

Station 10 R
completed

N0241
(0788)

Station 12
unclamp

Station 12 L
running

Station 12 L
completed

Station 12 L
cont.

Station 11 R
cont.

Station 11 R
completed

Station 11 R
running

N0251
(07D8)

Station 12
conveyor
running
Station 13
unclamp

Station 13 L
running

Station 13 L
completed

Station 13 L
cont.

Station 12 R
cont.

Station 12 R
completed

Station 12 R
running

N0252
(07E0)

Station 14 L
running

Station 14 L
completed

Station 14 L
cont.

Station 13 R
cont.

Station 13 R
completed

Station 13R
running

Station 13
clamp

Station 12
clamp
Station 13
conveyor
running

N0253
(07E8)

Station 15 L
completed

Station 15 L
cont.

Station 14 R
cont.

Station 14 R
completed

Station 14 R
running

Station 14
clamp

Station 14
conveyor
running

Station 14
unclamp

Station 15 R
cont.

Station 15 R
completed

Station 15 R
running

Station 15
clamp

Station 15
conveyor
running

Station 15
unclamp

Station 15 L
running

N0250
(07D0)

N0254
(07F0)

- 230 -

Fault
count
screen

Flow
diagnostic
screen

Running
display
screen

APPENDIX E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP

B-66254EN/05

E.2

OPERATOR'S PANEL PLC (M0112 TO M0254)


M0112 to M0117 are dedicated to the operator's panel, and cannot be used
for any other purposes.

M0112
(0380)
M0113
(0388)

7
Menu 2
blinking 3
Menu 4
blinking 1

6
Menu 2
blinking 2
Menu 3
blinking 5

M0114
(0390)

Alarm reset
turn-on work

Alarm reset
turn-on work

M0115
(0398)

Diagnosis
image output

Diagnosis
image blinking

Next alarm
turn-on work

Previous step
turn-on work

M0117
(03A8)

Waveform
sampling state
display
Menu page 4
blinking

M0118
(03B0)

Menu 4
BTN03

M0116
(03A0)

M0119
(03B8)

5
Menu 2
blinking 1
Menu 3
blinking 4
Previous
alarm turn-on
work

4
Menu 1
blinking 5
Menu 3
blinking 3
Compensation
3 page
blinking
Compensation
3 page
blinking

3
Menu 1
blinking 4
Menu 3
blinking 2
Compensation
2 page
blinking
Compensation
2 page
blinking

2
Menu 1
blinking 3
Menu 3
blinking 1
Compensation
1 page
blinking
Compensation
1 page
blinking

Flow NO
turn-on work

Flow YES
turn-on work

Menu 4
blinking 5

Menu page 4
blinking

Menu page 3
blinking

Menu page 3
blinking

Menu 4
BTN02

Menu 4
BTN01

Menu 4
BTN05

Menu 4
BTN04

M0120
(03C0)
M0121
(03C8)

M0124
(03E0)
M0125
(03E8)
M0126
(03F0)
M0127
(03F8)
M0128
(0400)
M0129
(0408)
M0130
(0410)
M0131
(0418)
M0132
(0420)
M0133
(0428)

0
Menu 1
blinking 1
Menu 2
blinking 4

Tool 2 page
blinking

Tool 1 page
blinking

Tool 2 page
blinking

Tool 1 page
blinking

Menu 4
blinking 4

Menu 4
blinking 3

Menu 4
blinking 2

Menu page 2
blinking

Menu page 2
blinking

Menu page 1
blinking

Menu page 1
blinking

Menu 1
BTN05

Menu 1
BTN04

Menu 1
BTN03

Menu 1
BTN02

Menu 1
BTN01

Menu 2
BTN05

Menu 2
BTN04

Menu 2
BTN03

Menu 2
BTN02

Menu 2
BTN01

Menu 3
BTN05

Menu 3
BTN04

Menu 3
BTN03

Menu 3
BTN02

Menu 3
BTN01

In break

In shift

Buzzer OFF
execution

Alarm code
read
completion

M0122
(03D0)
M0123
(03D8)

1
Menu 1
blinking 2
Menu 2
blinking 5

Manual
operation 1
outputBTN08
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN16
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN24
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN04
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN12
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN20
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN28
NC operation
output
outputBTN08
NC operation
output
outputBTN16
NC operation
output
outputBTN24

Fault display
output BTN07

Fault display
output BTN06

Fault display
output BTN05

Fault display
output BTN04

Fault display
output BTN03

Fault display
output BTN02

Fault display
output BTN01

Manual
operation 1
outputBTN07
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN15
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN23
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN03
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN11
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN19
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN27
NC operation
output
outputBTN07
NC operation
output
outputBTN15
NC operation
output
outputBTN23

Manual
operation 1
outputBTN06
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN14
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN22
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN02
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN10
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN18
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN26
NC operation
output
outputBTN06
NC operation
output
outputBTN14
NC operation
output
outputBTN22

Manual
operation 1
outputBTN05
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN13
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN21
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN01
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN09
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN17
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN25
NC operation
output
outputBTN05
NC operation
output
outputBTN13
NC operation
output
outputBTN21

Manual
operation 1
outputBTN04
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN12
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN20
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN28
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN08
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN16
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN24
NC operation
output
outputBTN04
NC operation
output
outputBTN12
NC operation
output
outputBTN20
NC operation
output
outputBTN28

Manual
operation 1
outputBTN03
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN11
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN19
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN27
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN07
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN15
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN23
NC operation
output
outputBTN03
NC operation
output
outputBTN11
NC operation
output
outputBTN19
NC operation
output
outputBTN27

Manual
operation 1
outputBTN02
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN10
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN18
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN26
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN06
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN14
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN22
NC operation
output
outputBTN02
NC operation
output
outputBTN10
NC operation
output
outputBTN18
NC operation
output
outputBTN26

Manual
operation 1
outputBTN01
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN09
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN17
Manual
operation 1
outputBTN25
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN05
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN13
Manual
operation 2
outputBTN21
NC operation
output
outputBTN01
NC operation
output
outputBTN09
NC operation
output
outputBTN17
NC operation
output
outputBTN25

- 231 -

Operator
's panel
work

Screen
display/
entire

Fault
display

Manual
operation
screen

NC
operation
screen

E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP APPENDIX


7
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN08
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN16
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN06
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN14
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN04
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN12

6
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN07
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN15
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN05
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN13
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN03
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN11

5
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN06
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN14
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN04
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN12
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN02
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN10
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN18

4
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN05
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN13
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN03
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN11
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN01
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN09
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN17

3
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN04
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN12
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN02
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN10
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN18
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN08
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN16

Tool
compensation
2 output
BTN03
Tool
compensation
4 output
BTN01

Tool
compensation
2 output
BTN02
Tool
compensation
3 output
BTN05

Tool
compensation
2 output
BTN01
Tool
compensation
3 output
BTN04

Tool
compensation
1 output
BTN05
Tool
compensation
3 output
BTN03

M0146
(0490)

Tool
compensation
4 count-up

Tool
compensation
3 count-up

Tool
compensation
2 count-up

Tool
compensation
1 count-up

M0147
(0498)
:
M0254
(07F0)

M0134
(0430)
M0135
(0438)
M0136
(0440)
M0137
(0448)
M0138
(0450)
M0139
(0458)
M0140
(0460)

Tool
compensation
1 output
BTN04
Tool
compensation
3 output
BTN02
Tool
compensation
4 output
BTN05

2
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN03
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN11
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN01
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN09
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN17
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN07
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN15
Pre-forecast 1
count-up
Pre-forecast 2
count-up
Pre-forecast 3
count-up
Tool
compensation
1 output
BTN03
Tool
compensation
3 output
BTN01
Tool
compensation
4 output
BTN04

1
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN02
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN10
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN18
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN08
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN16
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN06
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN14
Forecast 1
count-up
Forecast 2
count-up
Forecast 3
count-up
Tool
compensation
1 output
BTN02
Tool
compensation
2 output
BTN05
Tool
compensation
4 output
BTN03

M0141
(0468)
M0142
(0470)
M0143
(0478)
M0144
(0480)
M0145
(0488)

B-66254EN/05

- 232 -

0
Tool exchange
1

outputBTN01
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN09
Tool exchange
1
outputBTN17
Tool exchange
2
outputBTN07
Tool
Tool exchange exchange
2
outputBTN15 counter
Tool exchange screen
3
outputBTN05
Tool exchange
3
outputBTN13
Stop value 1
count-up
Stop value 2
count-up
Stop value 3

count-up
Tool
compensation

1 output
BTN01
Tool
Tool
compensation compen2 output
sation
BTN04
counter
Tool
compensation

4 output
BTN02
:

INDEX

B-66254EN/05

INDEX
CREATING FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

<A>

FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ........................212

ACTIVATING FANUC PICTURE ................................ 21

Creating Memory Card Format Data...............................36

ACTIVATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT

CYCLE MONITOR SCREEN ......................................152

TOOL (FPAssist) ............................................................ 35

Cycle Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ......152

Add Button for Multi-Language Setting Sheets ............ 212

Cycle Time Item Name and Measurement Signal

Adding a Multi-Language Caption Setting Sheet.......... 174

Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ..........................................118

Alarm display subscreen ................................................. 82

CYCLE TIME MEASUREMENT SCREEN................116

Assistant V-UP................................................................ 44

CYCLE TIME SETTING SCREEN .............................119

Automatic Screen Switching, Initial Screen Setting, etc. -

<D>

Setting Table (2/4) .......................................................... 64

DATA CREATION AND INPUT PROCEDURE ........206

Axis coordinate display subscreen .................................. 82

DATA REFLECTION IN FPASSIST...........................182

<B>

DATA STRUCTURE....................................................216

BTN01 to BTN07: Manual buttons................................. 72

Default name button ........................................................63

Built-in Safety Logic Status Screen .............................. 156

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND

BUTTON AND LAMP SIGNAL DISPLAY

NOTE ............................................................................. s-1

FUNCTION .................................................................... 11

Del...................................................................................51

Button Area Setting - Setting Table (2/2)........................ 76

Deleting Multi-Language Setting Sheets.......................213

Button Area Setting - Setting Table (4/4)...................... 144

Detailed description screen ...........................................137

<C>

Detailed Guidance Screen .............................................131

CHECKING DATA SETTINGS .................................. 181

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SCREEN SHEET

CHECKING SCREEN DATA ........................................ 53

LIST AND FORM DATA.............................................184

Compensation operation................................................ 100

Display and resetting of a current value ........................101

Compensation processing.............................................. 101

Display of tool exchange information .............................93

Components .................................................................... 72

DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS ................................191

COMPOSITE SCREEN DISPLAY ................................ 40

DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE CNC ......46

CONTROL TO BE READ IN USER FORM ............... 183

<E>

CONVERTING DATA................................................... 53

Edge type operation.......................................................117

Copy................................................................................ 52

EDITING A PROJECT ...................................................35

COPYING OPERATOR'S PANEL SCREEN DATA

Edition Display Screen....................................................57

AND THE FP DRIVER TO A MEMORY CARD ......... 39

Enter data in the detailed description sheet ...................211

Counter Setting - Setting Table (1/3) .............................. 94

ENTERING A MULTI-LANGUAGE CAPTION

Counter Signal Setting - Setting Table (2/3) ................. 104

SETTING SHEET.........................................................178

Counting of the number of faults and measurement of

Entering data in the flow diagnosis sheet ......................209

stop time........................................................................ 113

ENVIRONMENT, CONDITIONS, AND SETTING

Create .............................................................................. 50

OF THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT

CREATING A NEW PROJECT ..................................... 27

TOOL ............................................................................170

CREATING A SCREEN IN A LANGUAGE OTHER

ERROR .........................................................................181

THAN JAPANESE ...........................................................9

Explanation of Displayed Multi-Language Caption

Creating Display Information for Each

Setting Sheet Functions.................................................175

Alarm/Information Required for Diagnosis Flows........ 206

i-1

INDEX

B-66254EN/05

<F>

Lamp and Button Area Setting - Setting Table (1/4, 2/4,

FANUC Special Characters .......................................... 199

3/4) ................................................................................124

Fault Count Related Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ......... 115

Lamp and Manual Button Setting - Setting Tables (1/3,

FAULT COUNT SCREEN (USED FOR 36 AND 168

2/3) ..................................................................................79

FAULT ITEMS)............................................................ 112

Lamp Area and Button Area Setting - Setting Tables (1/4,

FAULT DISPLAY SCREEN .......................................... 71

2/4) ..................................................................................85

Fault Message Setting - Setting Table (4/4) .................... 90

Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3) .......................107

Fault Title and Presumed Cause Setting - Setting Table

Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3) .......................110

(1/4)............................................................................... 140

Lamp Setting - Setting Table (1/2)..................................75

Flow diagnosis continuation function after the power

Level type operation......................................................117

Is turned on again .......................................................... 137

LMP01 to LMP63: Lamps ..............................................72

FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT

LOAD TORQUE MONITOR SCREEN .......................145

PROCEDURE ............................................................... 204

Load Torque Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table

Flow Diagnostic Message Setting - Setting Table (2/4) 142

(1/1)...............................................................................145

FLOW DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN .................................. 133

<M>

Flow read function ........................................................ 138

MANUAL OPERATION 2 SCREEN...........................123

FPAssist Multi-Language Setting Sheet........................ 178

MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN (COMMON

FUNCTION OVERVIEW ............................................ 215

SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAGE 1 AND PAGE 2) .........77

<I>

MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN AND 5- BUTTON

I/O DEDICATED TO THE OPERATOR'S PANEL ........9

MENU.............................................................................12

Image File Name and Detail Message Setting - Setting

Measurement of the current value counter ......................92

Table (3/4)..................................................................... 143

Method of Alarm Code Transfer ...................................130

INDICATOR DISPLAY WHEN THE CNC SCREEN

Method of alarm code transfer ......................................136

DISPLAY FUNCTION (TWO-SCREEN DISPLAY) IS

Method of Composite Screen Output ..............................43

USED .............................................................................. 10

Method of flow diagnostic message creation ................136

Initializing the Add-in Tools for Excel2000 ................... 17

METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S

Input of Data into Excel Sheets..................................... 208

PANEL DATA..............................................................214

Input of Data into Multi-Language Setting Sheets........ 213

METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S

Input of data into the fault diagnostic screen sheet ....... 208

PANEL DATA WITH THE FL-NET FUNCTION ......218

INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPASSIST........... 15

MINIMIZATION ............................................................54

INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist /

Move ...............................................................................51

(A08B-9010-J513 #ZZ11)............................................... 15

Multi-Language Batch Input ...........................................36

INSTALLING MICROSOFT VISUAL BASIC ............. 14

MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL ............169

INSTALLING THE TOOL............................................. 13

Multi-Language Display of a Project with

Interlock (available with E3.02 and later) ..................... 102

Single-Language User Forms ........................................176

<J>

<N>

JIS Level 1 .................................................................... 193

NC OPERATION SCREEN............................................81

JIS Level 2 .................................................................... 198

NEED ............................................................................181
Numeric Display Area and Motion Sequence Setting -

<L>

Setting Table (4/4).........................................................125

LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3) .....107

PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3) .....110

COUNTER SCREEN.................................................... 200

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (3/3) .......80

i-2

INDEX

B-66254EN/05

<R>

Numeric display subscreen.............................................. 78

Registering Screens .........................................................60

<O>

REGISTERING/CHANGING/DELETING

OK................................................................................. 181

OPERATOR'S PANEL SCREENS.................................50

ONE-BYTE CHARACTERS........................................ 192

Relationship with the operational situation screen ........114

OPENING A PROJECT.................................................. 30

Rename............................................................................52

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ......................................4

Reread of a User Form ..................................................187

OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT

Reread of an FPAssist Form..........................................185

TOOL (FPASSIST)......................................................... 48

Resetting of a current value counter................................93

Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3) ............... 96

RESTRICTIONS...............................................................7

Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3) ............. 105

RUNNING DISPLAY 2 SCREEN................................109

Operation for Composite Screen Display........................ 41

Running Display Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3)....108

Operation Indicator Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3) 111

RUNNING DISPLAY SCREEN...................................106

OPERATION STATUS MONITOR SCREEN............. 126

<S>

Operation Time Setting Screen ....................................... 58


Operational Situation Item Setting ................................ 122

SAFETY IO STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN.................153

OPERATIONAL SITUATION SCREEN..................... 120

Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting - Setting Table

OPERATIONS OF THE MULTI-LANGUAGE

(1/2)...............................................................................159

BATCH INPUT TOOL ................................................. 171

Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting Setting Table

OPERATOR'S PANEL PLC (M0112 TO M0254) ... 231

(2/2)...............................................................................161

OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP ........................ 223

Screen Configuration.......................................................77

Output of Internal Operator's Panel Data - Setting

Screen Configuration.......................................................81

Table (4/4)....................................................................... 69

Screen Configuration.......................................................91

OVERVIEW .....................................................................1

Screen Configuration.......................................................99

OVERVIEW ................................................................. 205

Screen Configuration.....................................................106

OVERVIEW OF FPASSIST........................................... 49

Screen Configuration.....................................................109
Screen Configuration.....................................................112

<P>

Screen Configuration.....................................................116

Page switch method....................................................... 114

Screen Configuration.....................................................120

Path Selection Signal Setting - Setting Table (3/4) ......... 87

Screen Configuration.....................................................133

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREEN ...................... 163

Screen Configuration.....................................................147

Periodic Maintenance Screen Setting - Setting Table

Screen Configuration.....................................................153

(1/1)............................................................................... 165

Screen Configuration.....................................................163

PLC OPERATOR'S PANEL (N0080 TO N0254) .... 225

Screen Configuration.....................................................166

Procedure for Creating Screens That Support

SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE USING

Multi-Language Display Switching ................................ 26

FPASSIST .......................................................................56

Procedure for Creating Standard Screens for Toyota

SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN

Motor............................................................................... 25

CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPASSIST)..................55

PROCEDURE FOR SCREEN CREATION ................... 25

Screen function..............................................................133

Program check subscreen ................................................ 83

Screen Registration - Setting Table (1/4) ........................61

Project Screen List Sheet .............................................. 172

SCREEN REGISTRATION AND SETTING OF THE


ENTIRE SYSTEM..........................................................57

<Q>
Quality Check PMC Ladder and Timing Chart............. 149

Screen Specification......................................................123

QUALITY CHECK SCREEN ...................................... 147

Screen Switch Menu........................................................59

Quality Check Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ...... 150

SCREENS CREATABLE WITH THE TOOL .................5

i-3

INDEX

B-66254EN/05

SETTING A MENU FUNCTION................................... 27


Setting a Project .............................................................. 30
Setting and display of limit values ................................ 100
Setting and display of pre-forecast, forecast, and stop
values .............................................................................. 92
Setting of Counter Names and So Forth - Setting Table
(1/3)............................................................................... 103
SETTING ON THE CNC SIDE........................................8
Shift Time Setting - Setting Table (3/4) .......................... 68
Signal monitor subscreen ................................................ 78
SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................3

<T>
Ten-Key Pad Setting - Setting Table (2/3) ...................... 95
TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN .......... 99
TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 1 SCREEN ................ 91
TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 2 SCREEN ................ 97
TR SAFETY I/O STATUS DISPLAY.......................... 158
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDANCE SCREEN .......... 128
TWO-BYTE CHARACTERS....................................... 193

<U>
UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPASSIST ..... 19
UPGRADING THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH
INPUT TOOL ............................................................... 188
UPGRADING TO THE LATEST VERSION ................ 54
User Screen Multi-Language Setting Sheet .................. 180
USING FANUC PICTURE............................................. 20

<V>
VERSION DISPLAY...................................................... 54

<W>
WARNING ................................................................... 181
When two paths are used............................................... 102

< >
i MOTOR TEMPERATURE MONITOR SCREEN .. 166
i Motor Temperature Monitor Screen Setting Setting Table (1/1) ........................................................ 168

i-4

May, 2001

Jan., 2001

Date

01

Edition

03

02

Addition of following sections :


2.7, 2.8, 6.4, 7.2.2, 7.19, 7.20, 7.21, 7.22, 7.23, 7.24
Dec., 2003 Addition of explanations in following sections :
4.7, 7.5.2, 7.18.1.5, 7.18.1.6

Contents

Addition of explanations in following sections :


3.2 INSTALLING FAPT PICTURE & FPASSIST
4.1 ACTIVATING FAPT PICTURE
4.3 CREATING A NEW PROJECT
Addition of following sections :
3.3 UNINSTALLING FAPT PICTURE & FPASSIST
4.10 ASSISTANT V-UP

May, 2004

Addition or modification of following items :


2.2, 2.7, 2.8, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 6.5, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8,
7.12, 7.15, 7.17, 7.18, 7.19, 7.20, 7.21, 7.2.5.1, 7.22,
Appendix E, AppendixC.3

04

05

Addition or modification to explanations of the


Dec., 2004 simplified Chinese display function
1, 2.3, 2.5, 3.1, 4.2.2, 4.3.1, 4.3.3, 8.8

Edition

Date

Contents

FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist (For Windows) OPERATORS MANUAL(B-66254EN)

Revision Record